JP6592776B2 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game table provided with a production movable body is known.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, there is room for improvement in the production movable body in the conventional game stand

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature of a production movable body.

The above purpose is
Design display means;
A second image display means configured to include an image display capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game ;
First image display means different from the second image display means;
Driving means for driving the second image display means;
A game machine equipped with
The second image display means may move by driving the driving means,
During the period in which the second image display means is moving in the first direction (hereinafter referred to as “first period”), the first moving image may be displayed on the second image display means. ,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which an image moves in the first direction,
The second image display means can execute a first rotation as the first direction ,
During execution of the first rotation, an image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the second image display means, so that the pattern is the first image It is possible to show the player that it is not moving in the direction,
In a state before the second image display means performs the first rotation, an image of a part of the picture (hereinafter referred to as “first picture”) is displayed on the second image display means. Does not fit within the area, is not displayed on the second image display means,
The first display or the second display may be performed by rotating a predetermined angle in the first direction by the first rotation of the second image display means,
The first display is a display in which the first image is within the display area of the second image display means as the image of the first pattern.
The second display is a display in which the second image is contained in the display area of the second image display means as the image of the first pattern.
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, when the second display is performed rather than the case where the first display is performed, the jackpot symbol aspect is displayed after the symbol variation display. Easy to confirm,
It is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature of a production movable body.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) is an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (B)-(e) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention was equipped. is there. It is a figure which shows the determination table for common use in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and the operation at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric long opening effect performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric long opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the lottery table of the prefetching advance notice used by the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and the lottery table of the notice at the time of change disclosure (after big hit judgment). It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure explaining the movable body 1002 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (1) explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is FIG. (2) explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 14 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 15 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 21 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 22 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 24 of the 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 2000 as a game stand by the modification of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 3000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 4000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a home television set having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A game machine 6000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 7000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 that launches the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the chance to change the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 1) by the player's operation. To the button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that can be set by a setting person (for example, a player or a game clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 in this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The ease of entering the ball differs between a game ball that falls on the right path and a game ball that falls on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235, the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230, and the variable winning port 234, a game that falls on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively easy to enter a ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of universal figure floating games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of universal figure floating games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal start port 228, 229, a special view 1 start port 230, and a special view 2 start port 232, are variable around the rendering device 206. Winning ports 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the embodiment, one general-purpose start port 228 is disposed on the left path of the game board 200, and one general-purpose start port 229 is disposed on the right path. Unlike the ball that entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary drawing starting port 228 or the universal drawing starting port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 or the general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148, and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Wins at the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), or wins without winning any of the winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting ports 228, 229 Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. Further, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying the fourth symbol is disposed on the upper right side of the effect movable body 224. The 4th symbol display device 248 includes two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged side by side. For example, LEDs are used as the light sources of these two lamps. The upper lamp corresponds to FIG. 1 and the lower lamp corresponds to FIG. The fourth symbol display device 248 may include only one common lamp corresponding to both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the 4th symbol display apparatus may be provided in the production | presentation apparatus 206 (center accessory) like this example. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 4) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors An image stored in the ROM 406 based on a sensor circuit 428 output to the basic circuit 402 and a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads over data or the like to display an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIG. 5A to FIG. 5D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5 (a) shows seven types of special figures “Special figure A” to “Special figure G” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. "Special Figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined and the number of rounds are determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends, after the 7R special jackpot game ends and after the 7R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 7R special jackpot symbol, are symbols that become a special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and are 7R jackpot symbols. “Special figure C” is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing C” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R and “Special Figure B” which is 7R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called “open” time 100 ms × 2R) ends. If the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability will be displayed after the big hit game (opening time 29000 ms × 2R). Transition to the high probability state shown in FIG. 11 (see FIGS. 11A and 11B). In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special chart G” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is a 7R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missed symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special maps (of which five types are big hits) are used as the special symbol 2 as the special symbols 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. As the stop symbol pattern, four types of special maps (three of which are big hits) are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where it is possible to provide a difference between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable among the big wins. In this example, the big hit of Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that hardly give out balls, whereas the big hit of Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  And then, "Special Figure A" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure B" 7R special jackpot, "Special Figure C" 7R big jackpot, "Special Figure a" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure b" 7R special jackpot When the 7R jackpot of “special drawing c” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 2— Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special drawing F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing D” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing G” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stop-display modes for normal maps: “general map A” and “general map B” which are hit symbols, and “general map C” which is a misplaced symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 turns on all seven segments and displays one in the center. Repeatedly turn on the segment of “Usual change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of the four random number counters for generating the normal winning random number, the normal random number, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating each of the normal figure variation time determination random value and the special figure variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. 229, it is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228, 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter updated in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Four random number counters for generating the random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308 and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value for the normal value, generating the random number value for the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for use and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value have made one round each. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won, a prize ball provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting ports 228 and 229, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  Also, special figure 1 starting information (a pair of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (a pair of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) has been newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a winning at the general chart start port 228 or the general map start slot 229, and the corresponding general map hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is automatically displayed from the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal chart. Obtained as a winning random number value, obtains a regular random number value from a random number counter for generating a regular random number value provided in the RAM 308, and stores it in a regular random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The number of combinations of the random numbers and the common random numbers in the random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of reserved general numbers stored in the general number hold number storage area. In the standard random number storage area, each time the number of pending charts decreases by one, the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the highest ranking (first) in the ranking is deleted and the remaining Is processed so that the holding order of the data of the pair of the common figure winning random number and the common figure random number is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of pending orders increases by one, a new winning figure random number value and a new standing figure winning random number value in the next holding rank of the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the lowest ranking (last) Data of a set of regular random numbers is written. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general-purpose display device 210 is either one of the winning symbols (the common diagram A or B shown in FIG. 5D) and the off symbol (the common diagram C shown in FIG. 5D). The final symbol is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is set to 1 or more as a start condition, and is executed using a pair of the first common winning random number value and the common random number value in the common random number value storage area.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the normal start information (a combination of the normal winning random number and the normal random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) holding position in the normal random number storage area. On the basis of the obtained normal figure winning random number value in the obtained ordinary figure starting information, the value of the ordinary figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the determination table for the success / failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 9A and 9B described later). (Ref.) Is used to determine whether or not to win or not (determination of success / failure). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general random number value in the acquired general map start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the general map determination table stored in the ROM 306 (the hit shown in FIG. 9C). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the normal variation display is determined using the hour action table). Next, the main control unit 300, for example, selects various tables (for example, timer number selection (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the normal time change time, and the like. The normal fluctuation display time (timer number) is determined using a table, and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, erases the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, and Decrease the number of reserved maps in the area by 1. At this time, the general chart start information taken out from the standard random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the general chart start information stored in the temporary area. Also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets the common figure flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON when the determination result is successful (winning), and sets the common figure flag to OFF when not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on 5 (b) shows that the special figure a, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and the control is finished. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. When this miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, the 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, the small hit flag is on The special segment F is controlled to turn on / off the 7-segment LED constituting the special diagram 1 display device 212 so that the special flag F is turned on and the special flag G is turned on. Special figure 1 stop table To set indicating that it is in. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1) using the determination table (see FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d) described later). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the special figure determination table (FIG. 11 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 12A, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command related to a common symbol are also included as command types.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the timer number selected in, including the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. In the case of a start command and an end production start command, information including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, information indicating the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Contains information indicating presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In addition, if the command type is a normal symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per unit flag, a general symbol deviation flag, a general symbol probability variation flag, etc. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and variation time, and in the case of a regular symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, information indicating the value of the universal symbol per unit flag, the usual symbol deviation flag, the common symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery processes, and special figures. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize winning ports 234 and 235, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The predetermination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 8B to 8E) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the starting information in Fig. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. The determination as to whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased is made, for example, in the same way as in FIG. 2, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is done by comparing the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the present embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether to pre-read the starting information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-read result.

  FIGS. 8B to 8E illustrate a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 8B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special chart G” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special chart G” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 8C shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8C, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8C, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 8C, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 8 (d) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 8D, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 8E, in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage section, “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is not the stop symbol information but the prefetch result. May be stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8E, the storage area “pending 1” stores “timer 3” as timer number information, the storage area “pending 2” stores “timer 5” as timer number information, No timer number information is stored in the storage areas “hold 3” and “hold 4”. In FIG. 8E, a state in which the timer number information is not stored is expressed as “none”. In addition, when timer number information is stored in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage unit, the timer number may be set so as to correspond to the success / failure result.

  In the above description, an example is given in which stop symbols and timer numbers are pre-determined, and stop symbol information and timer number information are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. While being stored in the result storage unit, it may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetching result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  FIGS. 9A and 9B show an example of the success / failure determination table used when the success / failure determination is performed in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B includes items of “normal probability”, “random number range”, and “correction result”. The item “normal figure probability” indicates the normal figure probability (ordinary figure low probability or common figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “Random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired normal winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the normal winning random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a normal / failure determination table used when the probability of normalization at the time of determination of success / failure is low. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the winning probability is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9B is a normal / failure determination table used in the case where the normal probability at the time of determination is high. As shown in FIG. 9B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A, the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, it is possible to design so that only the hit is selected in the usual high probability state (during short-time operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time of short-time operation, but the probability of hit selection being higher at the time of short-time operation than at the time of short-time operation (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 9C shows a table for symbol allocation and hit operation for ordinary use. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the random number range distribution rate for each symbol (that is, the symbol of each symbol, which is compared with the general random number value when the stop symbol is determined in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223)). Equal to selection probability). As shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the case where the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful, the allocation ratio of each winning symbol is 50% for the normal-game A and 50% for the normal-game B. Normal maps A and B are symbols in which the electric chew release operation is executed after the normal variable game. It should be noted that when the determination result is out of order, only one out of the ordinary figure C is selected as the out of order symbol, so in the case of out of place, the ordinary figure C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the general figure C is selected, the electric chew release operation is not executed after the universal figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of FIG. A is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. A is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for 1800 ms, It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for about 1450 ms, and again It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 10A to 10D show an example of the determination table used when determining whether or not the lottery process is related to the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). Yes. The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a), the big hit probability is about 10 times and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10C, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10D, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  Fig.11 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is a distribution ratio of random numbers for each symbol (that is, each symbol) compared with the special symbol 1 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is the big hit, the special symbol A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E, excluding special drawing C, are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special drawings A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special illustrations A, B, and D are the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (due to short-time inactive) at the time of determination of success / failure (during symbol stop display) Regardless of the time)), the time is shortened (no time reduction is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of the determination of success or failure. The special figure E is a symbol in which the short time is activated after the big hit game is completed only when the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state or a normal figure high probability state. That is, when special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, when special figure E is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol continuously several times from a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure) However, after the second and subsequent stops, the short time is activated (the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered). In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, the probability of time reduction is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one kind of small hits symbol and off symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined to be a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. If it is out of place, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 1 random numbers.

  FIG.11 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the jackpot game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the jackpot game after special figure B or special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the jackpot game after special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter a game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is played at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the 100 ms attacker release is performed twice in one release opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  Fig.12 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each symbol) that is compared with the special symbol 2 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 12 (a), in the case where the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for the special figure a (15R special big hit), and the special figure b (7R special big hit) is 5%, special figure c (7R big hit) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Special illustrations a and b indicate the game state at the time of the success / failure determination (design stop display) (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (during short-time inactive) Regardless of the), the time is shortened (no time reduction setting is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of determination of success / failure. The probability that the time is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Accordingly, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random value. However, a plurality of types of missing symbols may be provided in the same manner as the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 2 random values.

  FIG.12 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or the special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, the attacker is released 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1 and has a longer open time of the attacker (or a larger R number). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 14A shows the flow of the electric long opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 14 (b) shows an example of an electric long open effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a normal-game variable game, and the special-image variable start game (electric-chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter referred to as a multi-game variable game). This may be referred to as “long opening”. It should be noted that an electric Chu long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric chochu is open!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol even after the normal signal fluctuation stop.

  The electric long-long opening effect process shown in FIG. 14 (a) is a normal symbol change start from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 13 (a). This is executed when a (start rotation) command is received.

  First, sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric long opening effect execution restriction flag for restricting the execution of electric long opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric long open effect is restricted. For example, even when the electric tulong release effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chew long release effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not dark-displayed and the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric-chu-long opening effect, It is possible to perform an electric Chulong opening effect that can entertain the user. Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect or demonstration effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  When the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric long-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric long-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu long opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S803 to start the usual symbol variation (start rotation). It is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful by referring to information about the normal-game hit flag and the normal-use flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful, the process proceeds to step S805, where the first sub-control unit 400 determines the normal figure from the command data of the normal symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is the normal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the usual figure variable game is the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects the effect whose effect type is “success pattern”, and opens the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and effects control of the main processing The process returns to the process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is not normal figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is “failure pattern A”, and releases the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern A”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal variable game is successful, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815, and executes an electric tulong open false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric long open false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for electric long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 is stored. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric long open false effect based on the result of the determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is to be executed, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S821, selects an effect whose effect type is “failed pattern B”, and sets it as the electric-chu-long opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern B”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is not to be executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes other control processing for not executing the electric-chu long opening effect, ends this processing, and performs the main processing. Return to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the process of the electric-chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 14, when the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric-chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a win. Alternatively, the lottery may be performed in the same manner as at the time of loss, and the presentation may be performed only when the lottery is won. Also, in this example, when the electric chew is open for a short time (short open) (general figure B), the production of “failure pattern A” is set. The effect “B” is set, but the same effect may be performed with a difference (common figure C) from the hit (normal figure B).

  FIG. 14B shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 14B shows a display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named “Land Stage” is executed. In the front of the background effect, the decorative display of the decoration pattern in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying special figure hold is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, an electric long open effect area d is arranged. An ordinary figure display device 210 (not shown) starts the ordinary figure variation game, and the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric-chu-long opening effect is executed in the electric-chu-long opening effect area d. As an electric Chu-long opening effect, a message that a samurai character is operating the lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is selected by winning the normal game. There is a roaring effect that makes the player expect that it may be released long. As shown in FIG. 14 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric tulong opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. In this way, the electric-chu-long opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decorative symbol variation display may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the electric-chu long opening effect. There may be.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 15A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, the command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 15B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 15C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). With this timer interrupt as a trigger, a timer interrupt process is performed at a predetermined time. Run in cycles. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control section main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, a specific example of effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

Example 1
16 and 17 show examples of effect display in Example 1 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 16A to 16R and FIGS. 17A to 17H show the effect display states at each time point in time series. 16 (a) to 16 (r) and FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (h) are respectively a front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Only the display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are extracted and shown. In each of the drawings, the variation display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is represented by a white bold arrow pointing downward. Further, the extinguishing portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black. Further, the state in which all segments of the special figure 1 display device 212 are shown in white indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is being performed. This also applies to the special figure 2 display device 214.

  In each of FIGS. 16A to 16R and FIGS. 17A to 17H, a circle that can display the fourth symbol is provided instead of providing the fourth symbol display device 248 shown in FIG. A shape 4th symbol display area 920 is provided at the lower right corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not a special figure variable game is being executed. During the execution of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 variable game, the white circle 4th symbol and the black circle 4th symbol are alternately displayed as if the 4th symbol display area 920 is flashing (hereinafter, “ In addition, in the present embodiment, whether or not the special figure variation game is successful can be notified in the fourth symbol display area 920. If the determination result is a big hit, the red 4th symbol is stopped and displayed in the 4th symbol display area 920, and if the determination result of the special figure variation game is out of place, the 4th symbol display area 920 is displayed. The blue circular fourth symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Moreover, the area | region enclosed by the square frame of the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in each figure is the fluctuation | variation icon display area 800 which can display a fluctuation | variation icon. The change icon is an icon displayed in the change icon display area 800 when the hold is consumed and the special figure change game is started. By changing the display mode of the variation icon in the variation icon display area 800, whether or not the special figure variation game is successful can be notified with a predetermined reliability (the variation notice). Note that the frame image on the outer periphery of the variation icon display area 800 may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area 800). It may be displayed constantly or may not be displayed at all times.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 16A, an area surrounded by a horizontally long rectangular virtual broken line frame adjacent to the right side of the change icon display area 800 at the lower part of the effect display area 208 d is shown in FIG. This is a special figure 1 hold icon display area capable of displaying a hold icon and a special figure 1 pedestal image 900 that is visually recognized so as to place the special figure 1 hold icon. The lower end side of the special figure 1 holding icon display area of this example is coincident with the lower end side of the image display area of the decorative symbol display area 208.

  In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, one or more special figure 1 hold icons can be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the number of special figure 1 variable icons can be notified by the number of special figure 1 hold icons, and the special feature related to the hold can be determined by the display mode of each special figure 1 hold icon. FIG. 1 It is possible to notify (pre-reading notice) whether or not a variable game is successful with a predetermined reliability.

  The special figure 1 pedestal image (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “special figure 1 pedestal”) 900 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The special figure 1 pedestal 900 of this example can be displayed so as to place a maximum of four special figure 1 holding icons, and the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area from left to right. Are roughly divided into four areas. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, the special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold can be displayed in the first area, and the second to fourth areas are similarly displayed in the second to fourth areas. The special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of each can be displayed. In this example, numbers 1 to 4 are respectively displayed in the first to fourth areas of the special figure 1 pedestal 900, and the positions of the first to fourth areas are clearly indicated by the displayed numbers. Clarification of the position of the fourth region may be omitted.

  The special figure 1 hold icon displayed on the special figure 1 pedestal 900 may be displayed in a display size different from the fluctuation icon (for example, a display size smaller than the fluctuation icon). This may facilitate identification of the special figure 1 hold icon and the fluctuation icon.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 16G, an area surrounded by a vertically long rectangular virtual broken line frame adjacent to the right end side of the effect display area 208d is a special figure 2 hold icon and the special figure 2 hold icon. Is a special figure 2 holding icon display area capable of displaying a special figure 2 pedestal image 910 that is visually recognized so as to be placed. The upper end side of the special figure 2 hold icon display area in this example is coincident with the upper end side of the image display area of the decorative symbol display area 208.

  In the special figure 2 hold icon display area, one or a plurality of special figure 2 hold icons can be displayed. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area, the number of special figure 2 variable games can be notified by the number of special figure 2 hold icons, and the special figure related to the hold can be determined by the display mode of each special figure 2 hold icon. FIG. 2 It is possible to notify (prefetching advance notice) whether or not the floating game is successful with a predetermined reliability.

  A special figure 2 pedestal image (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “special figure 2 pedestal”) 910 has a vertically long rectangular shape. The special figure 2 pedestal 910 of this example can be displayed so as to place a maximum of four special figure 2 holding icons, and the first area, the second area, the third area, and the fourth area from bottom to top. Are roughly divided into four areas. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, a special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the earliest hold (stored in the past) can be displayed in the first area, and the second to fourth areas are similarly displayed in the second to fourth areas. The special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the hold of each can be displayed. In this example, numbers 1 to 4 are respectively displayed in the first to fourth areas of the special figure 2 pedestal 910, and the positions of the first to fourth areas are clearly indicated by the displayed numbers. Clarification of the position of the fourth region may be omitted.

  The special figure 2 hold icon displayed on the special figure 2 pedestal 910 may be displayed in a display size different from the fluctuation icon (for example, a display size smaller than the fluctuation icon). This may facilitate identification of the special figure 2 hold icon and the fluctuation icon.

  FIG. 16A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. The special figure 2 display device 214 displays a special figure d (out-of-order symbol) which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. Further, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on, and it is informed that the number of the operation holding balls in the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is one. 2 All the LEDs of the hold lamp 220 are turned off, and it is informed that the number of operation hold balls in FIG. 2 (the hold number in FIG. 2) is zero.

  In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 7−” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. “Decoration 2—Decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 920 is a blue fourth symbol (indicated by a right-up hatching in the figure) for notifying the deviation. A special figure 1 holding icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 holding icon display area. The display form of the special figure 1 hold icon 901 is a white circle. In the present embodiment, the white circular display mode is set as the default display mode. Further, in the fluctuation icon display area 800, an erasing animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is executed. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In FIG. 16A, the variation icon 700 is deleted in the default mode. Further, the special figure 2 pedestal 910 and the special figure 2 hold icon 911 are not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

  FIG. 16B shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension has been completed and the special FIG. 1 variable game has started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 920 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become zero. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Further, when the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, in the variable icon display area 800 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the interval between the hold and change icons is changed. The moving animation is executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 becomes the change icon 801 and moves to the change icon display area 800. FIG. 16B shows a state in which the fluctuation icon 801 has completed the movement into the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons has ended. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is a white circle like the special figure 1 hold icon 901.

  FIG. 16 (c) shows a state in which the holding of special figure 2 is increased by one during the execution of special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold has increased from 0 to 1. In the fourth symbol display area 920, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. An animation in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 gradually descends from the upper right side of the image display area to a predetermined position in the special figure 2 hold icon display area and moves based on the increase in the special figure 2 hold from 0 to 1 ( Hereinafter, the execution of “special figure 2 pedestal movement animation” may be started. Further, when the holding of the special figure 2 increases, the execution of the holding increase animation 1 of the special figure 2 is started. The hold increase animation is an animation representing a state in which a hold icon indicating the number of holds increases.

  16 (d) to (g) show the state from the start to the end of the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation and the reserved increase animation 1 of the special figure 2 when the special figure 1 variable game is ongoing. Yes. In the 4th symbol display area 920, the variation display of the 4th symbol is executed. FIG. 16D shows a state in which the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation and the special increase animation 1 of special figure 2 are started. In the special figure 2 base movement animation, the special figure 2 base 910 is gradually lowered from the upper right side of the image display area so that the first area can be seen. In the reserved increase animation 1 of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 holding icon 911 whose display mode is a white square is located on the left side of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 and descends together with the special figure 2 pedestal 910. Is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 holding icon 911 gradually enlarges the display size while rotating around the rotation axis. FIG. 16E shows a state in which the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation and the reserved increase animation 1 of special figure 2 are being executed. In the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is further lowered to display the first and second areas. In the reserved increase animation 1 of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is located on the left side of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910, and is further lowered along with the special figure 2 pedestal 910. ing. The special figure 2 hold icon 911 further enlarges the display size while rotating around the center as a rotation axis. FIG. 16 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation and the reserved increase animation 1 of special figure 2 are being executed. In the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is further lowered to display the first to third areas. In the reserved increase animation 1 of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is located on the left side of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910, and is further lowered along with the special figure 2 pedestal 910. ing. The special figure 2 hold icon 911 further enlarges the display size while rotating around the center as a rotation axis. FIG. 16G shows a state where the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation and the reserved increase animation 1 of special figure 2 have been completed. In the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is further lowered and displayed in a state where the entire figure can be seen and stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 holding icon display area. In the reserved increase animation 1 of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is located on the left side of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 and further descends together with the special figure 2 pedestal 910. A display indicating a stop at the position on the left side of the first region of the pedestal 910 is made.

  Since the reserved increase animation 1 of the special figure 2 is executed in accordance with the execution of the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, the special figure 2 reserved icon 911 descends as the special figure 2 pedestal 910 descends.

  Further, in accordance with the change in the display of the pending increase animation 1 of the special figure 2 being executed, the visibility of the display such as the decorative symbol change display and the pre-reading notice in the special figure 1 variable game may be continuously changed. . The display of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 in the special figure 2 hold increase animation 1 has a higher display priority than the decorative symbol change display and the prefetch notice display. The display priority may be lower than the display of the notice. In the present embodiment, the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 has a higher display priority than the display of the decorative symbols, so that when these display images are displayed in the effect display area 208d, they are displayed. The display of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is displayed in front of the decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 16 (h) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 2 is increased by one during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 indicates that the special figure 2 hold has increased from 1 to 2. In the fourth symbol display area 920, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. When the holding of the special figure 2 increases, the execution of the holding increase animation 2 of the special figure 2 is started.

  FIGS. 16 (i) to 16 (l) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is continuing and from the start to the end of the holding increase animation 2 in the special figure 2. In this state, the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 holding icon display area in a state where the whole is visible. FIGS. 16 (i) to 16 (k) show a state in which the pending increase animation 2 shown in FIG. 2 is being executed. In the reserved increase animation 2 of the special figure 2, a special figure 2 hold icon 913 whose display mode is a white square is displayed on the left side of the second area of the special figure 2 base 910, and the display position is fixed without moving. There is an effect that the display size is gradually enlarged while rotating around the center as a rotation axis. In FIG. 16 (l), there is an effect in which the reservation increasing animation 2 of FIG. 2 is finished and the rotation of the special figure 2 holding icon 913 is stopped on the left side of the first region of the special figure 2 base 910. Yes.

  Further, according to the change in the display of the pending increase animation 2 of the special figure 2 being executed, the visibility of the display such as the decorative symbol change display and the pre-reading notice in the special figure 1 variable game may be continuously changed. . In addition, the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 913 in the special increase animation 2 of special figure 2 has a higher display priority than the display of the decorative pattern change display and the prefetch notice display. The display priority may be lower than the display.

  FIG. 16 (m) shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. Further, it is informed that all the LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are turned off and the number of the operation holding balls in the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is 0, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is displayed. The first to second LEDs from the left are turned on, and it is informed that the number of the operation holding balls in FIG. 2 (the number of holdings in FIG. 2) is two.

  In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 8- "Decoration 1-Decoration 9" is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 920 is a blue fourth symbol (indicated by a right-up hatching in the figure) for notifying the deviation. The special figure 2 hold icon 911 is displayed on the left side of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 in the special figure 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 2 hold icon 913 is displayed on the left side of the second area. Has been. Further, since the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 0, the special figure 1 holding icon is not placed on the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 holding icon display area. The display forms of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 and the special figure 2 hold icon 913 are both white squares. Further, in the variation icon display area 800, an erase animation of the variation icon 801 is executed. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In FIG. 16 (m), the variation icon 801 is deleted in the default mode.

  In FIG. 16 (m), the stop display of the decorative symbol has a higher display priority than the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 913, but the display priority is higher than the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 913. It may be lower. The display stoppage of the decorative symbol has a higher display priority than the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 and the special figure 2 pedestal 910, but from the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 911 and the special figure 2 pedestal 910. Also, the display priority may be low.

  FIG. 16 (n) shows a state where the suspension of the special figure 2 has been consumed and the special figure 2 variable game has been started. The special symbol 2 display device 214 executes the special symbol 2 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 920 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the second LED from the left of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is turned off, and it is notified that the holding number of the special figure 2 has decreased by 1 and the holding number of the special figure 2 has become one. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 notifies that the special figure 2 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 2 variable game.

  When the special figure 2 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 2 variable game is started, the variable icon display area 800 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the vicinity of the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 2 hold icon are displayed. In the display area, a moving animation between the hold / variation icons shown in FIG. 2 is executed. In addition, in the special figure 2 hold icon display area, the movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / variation icons of the special figure 2, the special figure 2 hold icon 911 displayed on the left side of the first area of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is changed to a change icon 811 whose display mode is a white square. Then, it moves from the special figure 2 hold icon display area over the special figure 1 hold icon display area to the variable icon display area 800. FIG. 16 (n) shows a state where the variation icon 811 is located above the third region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900.

  Also, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 gradually descends vertically from the special figure 1 holding icon display area based on the fact that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 0 at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. Execution of an evacuation animation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation”) is started.

  FIG. 16 (o) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons in FIG. 2, the movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon, and the special figure 1 base evacuation animation are continuing during the special figure 2 variable game. ing. In the movement animation between the hold / variation icons shown in FIG. 2, a display is shown in which the fluctuation icon 811 has moved to above the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. In the movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon, the special figure 2 hold icon 913 is moved from the left side of the second area of the special figure 2 base 910 to the left side of the first area. In the special figure 1 pedestal retraction animation, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is further lowered, and the lower half is retreated outside the special figure 1 holding icon display area. In the 4th symbol display area 920, the variation display of the 4th symbol is executed.

  In FIG. 16 (p), the special figure 2 variable game is continuing, the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icon of special figure 2 and the movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon are finished, and the special figure 2 variable game is completed. It shows a state in which the hold in FIG. 1 is increased by one during execution. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 1. In the fourth symbol display area 920, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons in FIG. 2, the change icon 811 has been moved into the change icon display area 800. In the special figure 2 holding icon movement animation, the special figure 2 holding icon 913 has completed the movement from the left side of the second area of the special figure 2 base 910 to the left side of the first area. During the execution of the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation, the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation is canceled based on the fact that the special figure 1 suspend is increased from 0 to 1, and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Execution of an animation that rises in the vertical direction to a predetermined position and returns (hereinafter, may be referred to as “special figure 1 pedestal return animation”) is started. Further, on the basis of the increase in the holding of the special figure 1, the execution of the holding increase animation 1 of the special figure 1 is started.

  FIG. 16 (q) to FIG. 17 (b) show the state from the start to the end of the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the reserved increase animation 1 of the special figure 1 when the special figure 2 variable game is continuing. Show. In the 4th symbol display area 920, the variation display of the 4th symbol is executed. FIG. 16 (q) shows a state where the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the reserved increase animation 1 of special figure 1 are started. In the special figure 1 pedestal return animation, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 gradually rises and more than half of the special figure 1 holding icon display area is displayed. In the reserved increase animation 1 of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 holding icon 903 rises together with the special figure 1 pedestal 900 from below the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 and moves to the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. The display is passing through the front. The special figure 1 hold icon 903 gradually increases the display size. FIG. 16 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the pending increase animation 1 of special figure 1 are continuing. In the special figure 1 pedestal return animation, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is further raised and displayed as a whole in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the reserved increase animation 1 of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 holding icon 903 further rises together with the special figure 1 pedestal 900, and the upper half of the circle is located above the first region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. The display is made. In the present embodiment, the movement speed of the special figure 1 holding icon 903 of the special figure 1 holding increase animation 1 in FIG. 1 is faster than the moving speed of the special figure 1 base 900 of the special figure 1 base return animation. It is not limited to. The special figure 1 hold icon 903 further enlarges the display size. FIG. 17A shows a state where the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the pending increase animation 1 of special figure 1 are continuing. In the special figure 1 base return animation, the special figure 1 base 900 is further raised. In the reserved increase animation 1 of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 holding icon 903 further rises together with the special figure 1 pedestal 900, and a display is shown that the whole is located above the first region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. Has been made. The special figure 1 hold icon 903 further enlarges the display size. FIG. 17B shows a state in which the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the reserved increase animation 1 of special figure 1 have been completed. The special figure 1 pedestal return animation is finished, and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 1 holding icon display area. The special increase 1 animation of the special figure 1 is finished, and the special figure 1 holding icon 903 is displayed above the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900.

  FIG. 17 (c) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 is increased by one during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 2. In the fourth symbol display area 920, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. When the holding of special figure 1 increases, execution of the holding increase animation 2 of special figure 1 is started.

  FIGS. 17D to 17H show a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is continuing and from the start to the end of the on-hold increase animation 2 in the special figure 1. In this state, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 1 holding icon display area in a state where the whole is visible. FIGS. 17D to 17G show a state in which the pending increase animation 2 in FIG. 1 is being executed. In the reserved increase animation 2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 hold icon 905 whose display mode is a white circle rises in the vertical direction from below the first region of the special figure 1 base 900 while gradually increasing the display size. Will be displayed. FIG. 17H shows a display in which the reservation increasing animation 2 in FIG. 1 is finished and the special figure 1 holding icon 905 is stopped above the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900.

  In FIG. 16 (q) to FIG. 17 (b), the reserved increase animation 1 of the special figure 1 is executed together with the special figure 1 pedestal return animation, and thus is affected by the special figure 1 pedestal return animation. On the other hand, since the reserved increase animation 2 of the special figure 1 in FIGS. Therefore, for example, when the moving speed of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation increases, the moving speed of the special figure 1 holding icon 903 in the holding increase animation 1 of the special figure 1 also increases, and the special figure 1 holding icon The movement speed of 903 may be faster than the movement speed of the special figure 1 hold icon 905 in the special increase animation 2 shown in FIG. Similarly, when the movement speed of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation decreases, the movement speed of the special figure 1 holding icon 903 in the holding increase animation 1 of the special figure 1 also decreases, and the special figure 1 holding icon 903 concerned. May move slower than the movement speed of the special figure 1 hold icon 905 in the special increase animation 2 shown in FIG. Thus, since the moving speed of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 in the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 1 fluctuates, the required time (execution required time) from the start to the end of the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 1 is ended. ) May also vary. Therefore, the execution required time of the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 1 may be longer or shorter than the execution required time of the hold increase animation 2 of the special figure 1. In addition, when the second display is an animation display, and the display position changes during the animation display, the first display is not displayed when the second display is displayed during the first display. The second display may be moved differently from the case where the second display is displayed. The operation in this case includes acceleration due to movement in the same direction, deceleration due to movement in opposite directions, change in movement direction due to movement in different directions, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means displays the special display as the second display when the display of the special figure 2 base 910 as the first display is displayed in the first display mode. The display of the hold icon 911 in FIG. 2 can be displayed in the second display mode. The first display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 gradually descends from the upper right side of the image display area in the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation. The second display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 gradually descends from the upper right side of the image display area in the hold increase animation 1. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means displays the second display 910 as a first display in a third display mode different from the first display mode. The display of the special figure 2 hold icon 913 as the display of can be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the second display mode. The third display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 holding icon display area. In the fourth display mode, the special figure 2 hold icon 913 is displayed on the left side of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 in the special increase animation 2 shown in FIG. This is a rotating display mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display unit can display the second display in the second display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode. The first display is an animation that maintains the state where the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position after the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation and the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation are finished (hereinafter referred to as “Special figure 2 pedestal stop (Hereinafter referred to as “Special Figure 2 Base Animation”). The first display mode is a display mode of the special figure 2 base in the special figure 2 base movement animation. The second display is an animation that maintains the state where the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is stopped at a predetermined position after the hold increase animation 1 shown in FIG. 2 and the hold increase animation 1 shown in FIG. (Hereinafter referred to as “Special Figure 2 Hold Icon Stop Animation 1”) (hereinafter, “Special Figure 2 Hold Animation 1”). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display means displays a special figure 2 pedestal animation as a first display in a third display mode different from the first display mode. When displaying, the display of the special figure 2 hold animation 1 as the second display can be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the second display mode. Is a display form of the special figure 2 pedestal in the special figure 2 pedestal stop animation, and a fourth display form is a display form of the special figure 2 hold icon in the special figure 2 hold icon stop animation 1. The animation is a concept including not only the state in which the image display is moving but also the state in which the image display is stopped.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means displays the special display 1 pedestal 900 as the first display in the first display mode. The display of the hold icon 903 in FIG. 1 can be displayed in the second display mode. The first display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 1 base 900 is raised vertically to a predetermined position in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the special figure 1 base return animation. The second display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 1 hold icon 903 rises from below the special figure 1 pedestal 900 together with the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation in the reserved increase animation 1 of the special figure 1. It is. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the special figure 1 pedestal 900 display in a third display form different from the first display form, and the special figure 1 hold icon 905 as the second display. Can be displayed in a fourth display mode different from the second display mode. The third display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 1 holding icon display area. The fourth display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 1 hold icon 905 rises from below the special figure 1 pedestal 900 separately from the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the reserved increase animation 2 of the special figure 1.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.

  In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means displays the second display as the third display when the display of the special figure 2 base 910 as the first display is displayed in the first display mode. The display of the fourth symbol in the four symbol display area 920 can be displayed in the fifth display mode. The first display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 1 base 900 is raised vertically to a predetermined position in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the special figure 1 base return animation. The fifth display mode is a display mode in which the fourth symbol is variably displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 as a display means displays the fourth symbol display as the third display when the display of the special figure 2 base 910 as the first display is displayed in the third display mode. The display of the fourth symbol in the area 920 can be displayed in the fifth display mode. The third display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 holding icon display area. The fifth display mode is a display mode in which the fourth symbol is variably displayed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, by enabling the display of the third display that is not affected by the first display, it is possible to display the first display and the first display by comparison with the third display. In some cases, the player can be focused on the second display. In addition, by making it possible to display a third display that is not affected by other displays, information relating to profits such as a lottery result may be reliably transmitted to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the amount of change from the first display mode to the third display mode is the first change amount. The first display mode is a position where the first area of the special figure 2 base 910 is first displayed after the special figure 2 base movement animation is started. The third display mode is the display position of the first region of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 at the end of the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation. The first change amount is the moving distance of the first region of the special figure 2 base 910. Further, the amount of change from the second display mode to the fourth display mode is the second amount of change. The second display mode is a position where the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is first displayed after the start of the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2. The fourth display mode is the display position of the special figure 2 holding icon 911 at the end of the holding increase animation 1 shown in FIG. The second change amount is the moving distance of the special figure 2 hold icon 911. Further, the first change amount is the same change amount as the second change amount.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the amount of change from the first display mode of the first display to the third display mode and the second display mode of the second display to the fourth display mode. By making the change amount of the same the same, it becomes possible to give a sense of unity to the entire display change displayed on the display means, and the player may be more focused on the display means.

  In this embodiment, a part of the display of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 as the first display displayed in the first display mode is a special figure 1 holding icon 903 as the second display in the second display mode. When the display is displayed, the visibility is lowered. The first display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 1 base 900 is raised vertically to a predetermined position in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the special figure 1 base return animation. The second display mode is that the special figure 1 holding icon 903 in the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is displayed together with the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation. It is a display mode that passes through the front surface of the first region and rises.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a case where the player can be focused on the second display rather than the first display by displaying the second display on the first display. is there. By reducing the visibility of at least a part of the first display, the player may be interested in the part, and the first display and the second display may be noted.

  In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 pedestal animation display as the first display is a display including the special figure 2 pedestal animation display as the first animation display. The display of the special figure 2 hold animation 1 as the second display is a display including the special figure 2 hold animation 1 as the second animation display. The display of the special figure 2 pedestal animation and the display of the special figure 2 holding animation 1 are different animation displays. The decorative symbol display device 208 as a display means can continuously display the special figure 2 pedestal animation display even when the display form of the special figure 2 pedestal animation is switched from the first display form to the third display form. is there. The first display mode is a special figure 2 pedestal movement animation, and the third display mode is a special figure 2 pedestal stop animation. Further, the display means can continuously display the special figure 2 hold animation 1 display even when the display form of the special figure 2 hold animation 1 is switched from the second display form to the fourth display form. The second display mode is the reserved increase animation 1 shown in FIG. 2, and the fourth display mode is the special figure 2 hold icon stop animation 1.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, even when the display mode of the first display and the second display is switched, the display of each animation is continued, so that the display mode is different. In some cases, it is possible to easily convey to the player that the display is the same and that the display is not different.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means displays the special display as the second display when the display of the special figure 2 base 910 as the first display is displayed in the first display mode. The display of the hold icon 911 in FIG. 2 is not displayed in the fourth display mode. The first display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 gradually descends from the upper right side of the image display area in the special figure 2 pedestal movement animation. In the fourth display mode, the special figure 2 hold icon 913 is displayed on the left side of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 in the special increase animation 2 shown in FIG. This is a rotating display mode. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the special figure 2 holding icon 913 as the second display when the special figure 2 pedestal 910 as the first display is displayed in the third display mode. Is not displayed in the second display mode. The third display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 holding icon display area. The second display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 holding icon 911 gradually descends from the upper right side of the image display area in the holding increase animation 1 shown in FIG.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display. In addition, by limiting the display period of the first display, the period during which the player should pay attention to the first display is limited, so that the player can be entertained without unnecessarily tiring the player There is.

(Example 2)
FIG. 18 shows an example of effect display in Example 2 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 18A to 18N show the effect display states for each time point in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 18A to 18N are the same as those shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  18 (a) to 18 (n), a decorative symbol display area, a variable icon display area 800, a special symbol 1 hold icon display area, and a fourth symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each figure. Arrangement of 920 etc., change display or stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, change icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth figure, etc. are as shown in FIG. Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 18A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is executed, and in the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure d (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is informed that the number of the operation holding balls in the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is one, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 has the operation shown in FIG. It is informed that the number of holding balls (the holding number in FIG. 2) is zero.

  Background animation display (first display) is performed as a background effect over the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The background animation of this example is displayed in the first display mode in which a background image including an image of two samurai sitting is drawn over the entire image display area in the period of FIGS. Is done. Display of the background animation in the first display mode is set to have the lowest display priority. In the background animation, the background image is reduced and displayed in the image display area in the period including FIGS. 18C to 18F after the display by the first display mode, and the background image further moves to the left. Displayed in the third display mode.

  In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the fourth symbol display region 920, the fourth symbol variation display is executed. In the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 holding icon display area, a special figure 1 holding icon 901 is displayed in a white circular default display mode. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 700 for the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 700 is a white circle.

  FIG. 18 (b) shows that an image simulating a bonsai tree of a pine tree (hereinafter referred to as "bonsai tree") while the background animation is being executed in the first display mode while the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The bonsai animation display (second display) using 922 may be executed. In FIG. 18B, the bonsai animation is displayed in a second display mode in which the bonsai 922 descends from above in front of the background image. Bonsai 922 gives notice of the result of the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 18C shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the background animation is displayed in the third display mode, and the bonsai animation is displayed in the fourth display mode. In the third display mode, the background image of the background animation is reduced and displayed. This reduced display of the background image is a notice for the change. As the background image is reduced, the display areas of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are also reduced. For this reason, another left middle right symbol display area 208a'-208c 'is provided in the upper right corner of the image display area, and the variation of the decorative symbol is displayed in two places. Further, the arrangement of the fluctuation icon display area 800, the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the fourth symbol display area 920, etc., the fluctuation display and stop display of the decorative symbols in the predetermined display area, the fluctuation icon 700, and the special figure 1 base 900 are displayed. The display of the hold icon 901, the 4th symbol, and the like are displayed in the original size at the original position without being linked with the reduced display of the background image. In a region other than the background image in the image display region, for example, a single color filled image is displayed. In the fourth display mode, the bonsai 922 is reduced and displayed as the background image is reduced.

  FIG. 18D is a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the display of the background animation in the third display mode is continued, and the display of the bonsai animation in the fourth display mode is continued. Is shown. In the third display mode, the background image is further reduced and the background image moves to the left. An image of another effect is displayed on the right side of the background image. In the fourth display mode, the bonsai 922 is further reduced as the background image is further reduced and moved to the left along with the background image. In this way, while displaying the notice by the bonsai 922, the notice by the reduced display of the background image is displayed at the same time. Note that the display contents of these two notices continue to be updated.

  Further, FIG. 18D shows a state in which the number of suspensions in the special figure 1 is increased by one during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 2. On the basis of the increase in the special figure 1 hold, execution of the special figure 1 hold increase animation is started, and the special figure 1 hold icon 905 starts to rise from below the second area of the special figure 1 base 900. . It should be noted that the pending increase animation accompanying the start prize is not affected by the advance notice due to the reduced display of the background image. In addition, since the hold icon is a prefetching notice, it can be said that the prefetching notice is not affected by the notice due to the reduced display of the background image.

  FIG. 18E is a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the display of the background animation in the third display mode is continued, and the display of the bonsai animation in the fourth display mode is continued. Is shown. In the third display mode, the background image is further reduced and the image display area is moved to the left. The entire animation image of another effect is displayed on the right side of the background image. In the fourth display mode, the bonsai 922 is further reduced as the background image is further reduced and moved to the left along with the background image. Also, the pending increase animation of Special Figure 1 is continuing. Note that a decorative pattern variation display is displayed on both the background animation and the animation of another effect.

  FIG. 18F shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the display of the background animation in the third display mode and the display of the bonsai animation in the fourth display mode are completed. In the image display area, the display area of another effect that has moved from the right is enlarged, and another effect is the center of the display. In addition, the pending increase animation in FIG. 1 has ended.

  In FIG. 18 (g) to (l), another effect is executed. The other effect is an effect depicting a battle between two samurai, and notifies the advance notice of the result of the special figure variation game. In FIG. 18G, some display may be performed in an area that can be visually recognized by a change in display. The display may be a display related to a game (for example, a display related to a player's profit such as a lottery result) or a simple decoration unrelated to the game. In FIG. 18 (h), after the display of the preview by the reduced display of the background image is completed, another preview of the change is displayed. The other notice introduction part is displayed during the notice display by the reduced display of the background image as shown in FIG. FIG. 18 (m) shows a state in which “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 18 (n) shows a state in which “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” is stopped and the big hit is confirmed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.

(Example 3)
FIG. 19 shows an example of effect display in Example 3 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 19A to 19I show the effect display states for each time point in time series. 19 (a) to 19 (i) are the same as those shown in FIG. 16 (a) of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  19A to 19I, the decorative symbol display area, the variable icon display area 800, the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the fourth symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each figure of FIG. Arrangement of 920 etc., change display or stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, change icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth figure, etc. are as shown in FIG. Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 19A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is executed, and in the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure d (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is informed that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is two. It is informed that the number of holding balls (the holding number in FIG. 2) is zero.

  In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the image display area, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the fourth symbol display region 920, the fourth symbol variation display is executed. Special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 903 are displayed in the first and second areas of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the default display mode of a white circle. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 700 for the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 700 is a white circle.

  In the effect display area 208d, an image imitating a treasure box (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “treasure box”) is displayed on the right hand as a first display, and an image relating to a chance button (hereinafter “button” is displayed on the left hand as a second display. May be referred to as “image”). The button image includes an image that imitates a chance button with characters “CHANCE” written on the pressing surface, a gauge image that indicates an operation valid period, an image of a character string “PUSH!” That prompts pressing, The image of the character string “Is it out?” Is a set. The display of the button image is also used as an operation promotion display as a notice for the change.

  The treasure box display (first display) is displayed in a first display mode indicating a state in which the box lid is closed and placed during the period of FIGS. The button image display (second display) is displayed in a second display mode in which the gauge image is changed according to the remaining operation effective period during the same period.

  FIG. 19C shows that, based on the player pressing the chance button, the image imitating the chance button changes to the pressed state, and the gauge image indicating the operation valid period and the characters “PUSH!” Prompting the pressing are displayed. The button image is displayed in a second display mode in which the image of the column and the image of the character string “What will come out?” Disappear.

  FIG. 19D shows a state in which a straight cut image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “cut”) is displayed obliquely up and down at the center of the image display area as a display based on the button operation. Yes. The display of the break is affected by the presence or absence of the display depending on the button operation by the player. The display of a break indicates the display start timing that affects other displays.

  FIG. 19 (e) shows a state in which the left and right images are displayed so that the left and right images are gradually shifted from the cut portion. The treasure chest is displayed in a third display mode indicating a state where the lid is opened and placed. The button image is displayed in a fourth display mode in which the button image itself is not displayed.

  FIGS. 19 (f) and 19 (g) show an image in which the family crest, which is usually a premier notice of a big hit, jumps out of the treasure box and is divided into areas divided from side to side. This shows a state in which a notice regarding fluctuation is continuously displayed. In addition, a state in which a new notice display is performed on the rear surface that is divided and exposed is shown. While the divided area moves to the left and right, the display on the back surface may be updated and the effect on the back surface may progress. FIG. 19 (h) and FIG. 19 (i) show a state in which new notice display is continuously displayed. After this, through a confrontation super-reach effect, the decorative symbol “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and the jackpot is confirmed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.

Example 4
FIG. 20 shows an example of effect display in Example 4 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 20A to 20J show the effect display states for each time point in time series. 20 (a) to 20 (j) are the same as those shown in FIG. 16 (a) of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  20 (a) to 20 (j), a decorative symbol display area, a variable icon display region 800, a special symbol 1 hold icon display region, and a fourth symbol display region within the image display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Arrangement of 920 etc., change display or stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, change icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth figure, etc. are as shown in FIG. Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 20A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is executed, and in the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure d (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is informed that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is two. It is informed that the number of holding balls (the holding number in FIG. 2) is zero.

  In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the image display area, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the fourth symbol display region 920, the fourth symbol variation display is executed. Special figure 1 hold icons 901 and 903 are displayed in the first and second areas of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the default display mode of a white circle. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 700 for the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 700 is a white circle.

  In the effect display area 208d, an image imitating a treasure box (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “treasure box”) is displayed on the right hand as a first display, and an image relating to a chance button (hereinafter “button” is displayed on the left hand as a second display. May be referred to as “image”). The button image includes an image that imitates a chance button with characters “CHANCE” written on the pressing surface, a gauge image that indicates an operation valid period, an image of a character string “PUSH!” That prompts pressing, The image of the character string “Is it out?” Is a set. The display of the button image is also used as an operation promotion display as a notice for the change.

  The treasure box display (first display) is displayed in a first display mode showing a state in which the box lid is closed and placed during the period of FIGS. The button image display (second display) is displayed in a second display mode in which the gauge image is changed according to the remaining operation effective period during the same period.

  FIG. 20C shows a state in which a jagged cut image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “cut”) is displayed above and below the center of the image display area within the operation effective period. In this way, when the display of a break that affects the display mode of the display related to the operation effective period is started during the operation effective period, the display of the effective period is continued, but the acceptance of the operation is stopped. Also good. Further, the validity period display itself may be erased. Even if there is a button operation by the player, the display based on the operation may not be performed.

  FIG. 20D shows a state in which the left and right images are displayed so that the left and right images are gradually moved from side to side from the cut. While the display is divided, the button operation promotion display and the display showing the remaining effective period are continuously displayed.

  FIG. 20 (e) shows a state in which the left and right regions are further shifted to the left and right by being divided into left and right from the cut portion. Further, based on the player pressing the chance button, the image imitating the chance button is changed to a pressed state, a gauge image indicating the operation valid period, an image of a character string “PUSH!” The button image is displayed in the second display mode in which the image of the character string “What will come out?” Disappears. The display affected by the change of the display area may be started during the change of the display area, or the change of the display area may be started during the display of the display affected by the change of the display area. . Further, the display affected by the change may be started simultaneously with the change of the display area.

  FIG. 20 (f) shows a state in which the left and right regions are further shifted to the left and right by being divided into left and right from the cut portion. The treasure chest is displayed in a third display mode indicating a state where the lid is opened and placed. The button image is displayed in a fourth display mode in which the button image itself is not displayed. In addition, a family crest is displayed as a new notice display on the rear surface which is divided and exposed.

  FIG. 20 (g) and FIG. 20 (h) show an image of a state in which a family crest, which is usually a premier notice of a big hit, jumps out of a treasure box and is divided in an area divided from side to side. This shows a state in which a notice display regarding fluctuation is continuously displayed. In addition, a family crest is displayed as a new notice display on the rear surface which is divided and exposed. Thus, the display contents of the new display and the display terminated by the new display may be common. Moreover, it is sufficient that at least a part of the display mode is the same.

  FIG. 20 (i) and FIG. 20 (j) show a state in which new notice display is continuously displayed. After this, through a confrontation super-reach effect, the decorative symbol “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and the jackpot is confirmed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.

(Example 5)
21 and 22 show examples of effect display in Example 5 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 21 (a) to (l) and FIGS. 22 (a) to (f) show the effect display states for each point in time in this order. The configurations shown in FIGS. 21A to 21L and FIGS. 22A to 22F are the same as those shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment, and have the same operations and effects. Therefore, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  21 (a) to (l) and FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (f), the decorative symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon display area 800, and the special figure 1 Arrangement of the hold icon display area, the 4th symbol display area 920, etc., the change display or stop display of the decorative symbols in the predetermined display area, the change icon 700, the special figure 1 pedestal 900, the hold icon 901, the display of the 4th pattern, etc. Is the same as that shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, an effect display by image display using so-called shake vision will be described. In shake vision, image display in a non-shake state and image display in a shake state can be executed. The non-shake state is a state in which a plurality of images are displayed inside a normal rectangular (or square) display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. The shake state is a state in which a plurality of internal images are also deformed and displayed in response to the transformation of the rectangular (or square) display area in the non-shake state to the rhombus (or trapezoid) display area. For example, assuming that one of a plurality of images displayed in a rectangular (or square) display area in a non-shake state is a rectangle (hereinafter referred to as a “rectangular image”), a rectangular image in a shake state If the interior angle of the vertex of the rectangle closest to a certain vertex is less than 90 degrees, the interior angle of the certain vertex is transformed so that at least the interior angle of the certain vertex is less than 90 degrees. When the interior angle of the vertex of the rectangle closest to the vertex is an angle exceeding 90 degrees, at least the interior angle of the certain vertex is deformed so as to be an angle exceeding 90 degrees. It should be noted that one of the plurality of images displayed inside the rectangular (or square) display area is deformed in the same manner in the case of a general figure other than a rectangle such as a triangle or a circle.

  FIG. 21A shows a state after the end of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. Further, the special figure d (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is informed that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is two. It is informed that the number of holding balls (the holding number in FIG. 2) is zero.

  In FIG. 21A, the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in a non-shake state. A plurality of images are displayed (second display) inside a frame display (first display) that defines an image display area in the display screen. In the second display of the present example, the decorative symbols change display and stop display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the change icon display area 800, the change icon 700, the special figure 1 pedestal 900, and the special figure 1 hold icon. Each display is included. The variation display and stop display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 920 are not included in the second display. The frame display demarcating the image display area is displayed as a rectangular frame having the entire display screen as the display mode (first display mode) in the non-shake state. Moreover, the display of the several image inside a frame is displayed on the non-deformation normal shape as a display mode (2nd display mode) in a non-shake state.

  In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 8-decoration 0-decoration 2” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is stopped and displayed as a fourth symbol display. In the area 920, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900, a special figure 1 hold icon 901 is displayed in a white circular display mode. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is executed.

  FIG. 21 (b) shows a state immediately after the suspension of the special figure 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started during the display in the non-shake state. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 920 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. The decorative symbol variation display starts from the left symbol display area 208a first, and then the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c in this order. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become one. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Further, when the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the variable icon display area 800 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are arranged between the hold / variable icons. The movement animation of the hold icon is executed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is changed to the change icon 801 and moved to the change icon display area 800. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is a white circle like the special figure 1 hold icon 901. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 displayed above the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is moved above the first area. The display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is a white circle like the special figure 1 hold icon 901.

  FIG. 21C shows a state in which the non-shake state is changed to the shake state. The frame display that defines the image display area is displayed in a rhombus shape on the display screen as a display mode (third display mode) in the shake state. The outside of the diamond-shaped frame in the display screen is black. In addition, the display of the plurality of images inside the frame is displayed as a display mode (fourth display mode) in the shake state, deformed according to the deformation of the frame display. Specifically, the frame display demarcating the image display area is displayed so that the left side is deeper than the right side by the shake display. The frame display demarcating the image display area is affected by being transformed into a shake display, so that the display of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 as the second display is deformed so that the left side is deeper than the right side. Has been displayed. The fluctuating decorative symbol, the fluctuating icon 801, and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 also appear to be deeper on the left side than on the right side due to the influence that the frame display defining the image display area is transformed into a shake display. Is displayed. In addition, a white square image (hereinafter, also referred to as “hold icon count display”) indicating the number of reserved icons in FIG. 1 inward is displayed at the upper left end of the image display area. This indicates that the number of held icons is one. Also, the low-speed decorative design immediately after the start of the special figure 1 variable display is displayed by being deformed according to the deformation of the frame display, and the left side is deeper than the right side.

  FIG. 21D shows the special figure 1 variable game being executed in the shake state. The frame display defining the image display area is displayed in a third display mode in which the shake state is continued. The frame display is displayed such that the right side is deeper than the left side. Under the influence of the deformation of the frame display, the special display 1 hold icon 903, which is the second display, is displayed in a shape in which the right side is deeper than the left, which is the fourth display mode. ing. In addition, the decorative symbol being changed, the changing icon 801, and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 are also displayed such that the right side is deeper than the left side due to the influence of the deformation of the frame display. Further, even when the frame display is in the shake state and the display is continued, the display of the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon is continued.

  FIG. 21E shows a state where the shake state is changed to the non-shake state. The frame display demarcating the image display area is displayed in a rectangular shape that fills the display screen as a display mode (first display mode) in a non-shake state. In addition, the display of the plurality of images inside the frame is an undeformed normal display as a display mode (second display mode) in a non-shake state. For example, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is displayed in a normal circular shape. In this embodiment, the number of held icons is not displayed in the non-shake state, but may be displayed constantly.

  21 (f) to (k), the shake display that is the third display mode from the non-shake state in which the special display 1 variable game is being executed and the frame display that defines the image display area is the first display mode. The state where the shake state is continued after entering the state is shown. The frame display demarcating the image display area is displayed so that the right side is deeper than the left side by the shake display. A shape in which the display of the special figure 1 hold icon 903, which is the second display, is deeper on the right side than the left, which is the fourth display mode, under the influence of the frame display being transformed into the shake display Is displayed. Also, the decorative pattern, the changing icon 801, and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 that are changing are also displayed so that the right side is deeper than the left side due to the influence of the frame display being deformed in the shake state. . The area other than the frame display that defines the image display area is darkly displayed. In FIG. 21 (f), the number of held icons is displayed at the upper left end of the display screen, indicating that the number of held icons in FIG. FIG. 21 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 suspension is increased by one during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 2. The number of held icons is displayed at the upper left end of the display screen, indicating that the number of held icons in FIG. 1 is two. The frame display that defines the image display area continues the shake display state that is the third display mode, and the frame display is displayed as if the right side is deeper than the left side by the shake display. Yes. Further, the second display is also displayed in a shape in which the right side is deeper than the left side which is the fourth display mode. In FIG. 21 (h), the frame display demarcating the image display area continues the shake display state that is the third display mode, and the frame display is further deepened on the right side than on the left side by the shake display. Is displayed. Further, the second display is also displayed in a shape in which the right side is deeper than the left side which is the fourth display mode. Also, based on the increase in the special figure 1 hold, execution of the special figure 1 hold increase animation is started, and the special figure 1 hold icon 905 starts to rise from below the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. ing. FIG. 21 (i) shows a state in which the frame display that defines the image display area continues the shake display state that is the third display mode. The second display also continues the shake display state that is the fourth display mode. In addition, the special figure 1 holding increase animation is being executed, and the special figure 1 holding icon 905 is further raised to pass the front of the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. The surface inside the outline of the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is red (indicated by a left-upward hatching in the figure), and a character image of “heat” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “heat”) is displayed. Is visible. While the display of the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is displayed in a shape where the right side is deeper than the left side due to the influence that the frame display is transformed into the shake display, the display showing the number of holds Is done. The display may be always performed. FIG. 21J illustrates a state in which the frame display that defines the image display area continues the shake display state that is the third display mode. The second display also continues the shake display state that is the fourth display mode. Further, the special figure 1 holding increase animation is being executed, and the special figure 1 holding icon 905 is further raised and is being placed above the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. FIG. 21 (k) shows a state in which the frame display defining the image display area continues the shake display state which is the third display mode. The second display also continues the shake display state that is the fourth display mode. The display of the special figure 1 hold icon 905 that is displayed as a pre-reading notice under the influence of the frame display being transformed into the shake display after the display of the special increase animation of special figure 1 is finished, is more right than left. It is displayed in a shape that is deeper. In addition, after the execution of the reserved increase animation in FIG. 1 is finished, the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is further raised to show a state where it is completely placed above the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. Yes. Even during the shake display, the hold icon increasing animation may be displayed such that the special figure 1 hold icon 905 appears from outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the special figure 1 hold icon 905 may be displayed as if part of it is overlooked.

  FIG. 21 (l) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the frame display demarcating the image display area changes from the state of the shake display as the third display mode to the non-shake state as the first display mode. The changed state is shown. Further, the second display also shows a state where the shake display state which is the fourth display mode is changed to the non-shake state which is the second display state.

  FIG. 22A shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 22A to 22F, the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the non-shake display (normal display) in which the frame display defining the image display area is the first display mode is continued. Indicates the state. The second display also shows a state in which the non-shake state that is the second display state is continued. FIG. 22 (b) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 is increased by one during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 1 to 2. In FIG. 22C, the execution of the reservation increasing animation of the special figure 1 is started based on the increase of the special figure 1 holding, and the special figure 1 holding icon 905 is displayed from below the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. Indicates a state in which it has started to rise. FIG. 22D shows the state where the special increase animation of FIG. 1 is being executed, and the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is further raised and passes the front of the second region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. ing. The surface inside the outline of the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is red (indicated by a left-upward hatching in the figure), and it is visible that “heat” is displayed. FIG. 22E shows a state in which the special increase animation of FIG. 1 is being executed, and the special figure 1 hold icon 905 is further raised and is being placed above the second region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. Show. FIG. 22 (f) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon 905 is further elevated and is completely placed above the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 after the execution of the reserved increase animation of the special figure 1 is completed. Indicates the state.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.

(Example 6)
FIG. 23 shows an example of effect display in Example 6 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 23A to 23M show the effect display states for each time point in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 23A to 23M are the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects. The description is omitted.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display area, the variable icon display area 800, the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the fourth symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each of FIGS. Arrangement of 920 etc., change display or stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, change icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth figure, etc. are as shown in FIG. Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 23A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. Further, the special figure d (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is informed that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is two. It is informed that the number of holding balls (the holding number in FIG. 2) is zero.

  Background animation display (first display) is performed as a background effect over the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The background animation of this example is displayed in the first display mode in which an image of a white background paper is drawn over the entire image display area in the period including FIGS. Display of the background animation in the first display mode is set to have the lowest display priority. In addition, the background animation is such that the white paper gradually turns from the lower left corner during the period including FIGS. 23E to 23K after the display by the first display mode, and another animation appears on the exposed surface. In addition, the image is displayed in a third display mode in which other images are hidden by the turned-up portion of the paper.

  In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7” indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. In the area 920, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the disengagement is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fluctuation icon display area 800, an erasing animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is executed.

  In the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900, a special figure 1 hold icon 901 is displayed in a white circular default display mode. In addition, a character image (hereinafter referred to as “first error display”) is displayed at the upper end of the image display area. On the front of the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900, as a second display, a character image of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as “second May be referred to as “error display”). The second error display is displayed in the second display mode in which the entire image can be visually recognized without being hidden by other images in the period including FIGS. In addition, the second error display is a fourth display mode in which a part of the image cannot be visually recognized by the display according to the third display mode of the background animation in the period including FIGS. Is displayed. In FIG. 23 (a), a special figure 1 hold icon 903 is placed above the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. Since the display priority is higher than the display of the special figure 1 pedestal 900, the special figure 1 holding icon 903 and the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 are not visible. Further, since the display priority of the second error display is higher than the stop display of the decorative symbol, the lower half of the middle symbol display area 208b cannot be visually recognized by the second error display.

  FIG. 23 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 920 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Further, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off, and it is notified that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become 1. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Further, when the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the variable icon display area 800 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are arranged between the hold / variable icons. The movement animation of the hold icon is executed in the special icon 1 hold icon display area. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 displayed above the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 becomes the change icon 801 and moves to the change icon display area 800. Yes. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is a white circle like the special figure 1 hold icon 901. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the left half of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 moving from above the second area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 to above the first area is visible from behind Yoshimune. The display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is a white circle like the special figure 1 hold icon 901. In the 4th symbol display area 920, the variation display of the 4th symbol is executed.

  FIG. 23 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the movement animation between the hold / change icon and the movement animation of the hold icon are being executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the change icon 801 is further moved to the change icon display area 800. In the movement animation of the hold icon, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is further moved above the first area of the special figure 1 base 900.

  FIG. 23 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished. The movement animation between the hold / change icons has ended, and the change icon 801 has completed moving to the change icon display area 800. The movement animation of the hold icon has ended, and the special figure 1 hold icon 903 has completed the upward movement of the first area of the special figure 1 base 900.

  FIG. 23 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. Also, decorative symbol display areas 208a ′ to 208c ′ in which the right middle left symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed (hereinafter referred to as “reduced symbol display areas”) 208a ′ to 208c ′ are displayed on the upper right side of the image display area. The first error display is displayed in front of the right reduced symbol display area 208a ′. In the background animation, as the effect display of the special figure 1 variable game, the white paper starts to be turned from the lower left corner, and the display in the third display mode is started. The second error display, which is the second display, is displayed in the second display mode in which the entire display is displayed.

  FIG. 23F shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The background animation of the background display, which is the first display, is being executed, and the effect is such that the paper is turned further from the lower left side of the image display area of the third display mode. The part is visible. The second error display, which is the second display, is affected by the background animation, which is the first display, and is displayed in a fourth display mode that is hidden by the paper turnover display and is partially invisible. The change icon display area 800, the change icon 801, the hold icon 903, and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 are displayed in their entirety without being affected by the background animation of the background effect that is the first display and not being hidden by the paper turning display. Has been. The second error display is hidden by the paper turning display due to the influence of the background animation.

  FIG. 23 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The background animation of the background display that is the first display is being executed, and the effect that the paper is turned further from the lower left side of the image display area of the third display mode, and the effect that is being executed on the back is further Visible. The visibility of the performance being performed on the back changes depending on the paper turning display. The second error display, which is the second display, is shown in the fourth display mode that is hidden by the paper turnover display under the influence of the background animation of the background effect, which is the first display. ing. In addition, the left middle symbol display areas 208a to 208b are almost entirely hidden in the paper turning display due to the influence of the background animation of the background effect which is the first display. Further, the first error display is displayed entirely without being influenced by the background animation of the background effect which is the first display and not being hidden by the paper turning display. When an effect is provided in the image display area in which the special figure 1 variable game is executed, the effect may be continuously displayed.

  FIG. 23 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The background animation of the background display that is the first display is being executed, and the effect that the paper is turned further from the lower left side of the image display area of the third display mode, and the effect that is being executed on the back is further Visible. The second error display, which is the second display, is shown in the fourth display mode that is hidden by the paper turnover display under the influence of the background animation of the background effect, which is the first display. It is gone. Further, half of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden in the paper turning display due to the influence of the background animation of the background effect which is the first display. Further, the left middle right reduced symbol display areas 208a 'to 208c' are displayed in their entirety without being affected by the background animation of the background effect as the first display and not being hidden by the paper turning display.

  FIG. 23 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The background animation of the background display, which is the first display, is being executed, and the effect is being performed on the back with the effect that the turned-up paper is restored from the effect that the paper of the third display mode is turned over The visible area of is gradually reduced. The second error display that is the second display is influenced by the background animation of the background effect that is the first display, and is displayed in a fourth display mode that is hidden in the paper turnover display so that it can be gradually seen. It has become. The right symbol display area 208c is entirely visible under the influence of the background animation of the background effect which is the first display. The first error display is not affected by the background animation of the background effect and is displayed in its entirety without being hidden by the paper turnover display, but the second error display is affected by the background animation of the background effect. It is hidden and displayed in the paper turnover display. Even if a plurality of displays have similar contents, not all displays are affected, and not all displays are affected.

  FIG. 23 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The background animation of the background display that is the first display is being executed, and the effect that the paper turned up from the effect that the paper of the third display mode is turned over is further executed and executed on the back side. The visually recognizable area of the production is gradually becoming smaller. The second error display, which is the second display, is shown in a fourth display mode that is hidden by the paper turning display under the influence of the background animation of the background effect, which is the first display. An effect that the paper turned by the background animation of the background effect, which is the first display, is returned to the original, so that almost the entire second error display can be visually recognized. Since the decorative symbol in the special figure 1 variation display is also affected by the background animation, the reduced symbol display areas 208a ′ to 208c ′ that are not influenced by the background animation are displayed.

  FIG. 23 (k) shows a state in which “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left middle symbol display area 208a and the left reduced symbol display area 208a ′ while the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. The background animation of the background display that is the first display is being executed, and the effect that the paper turned up from the effect that the paper of the third display mode is turned over is further executed and executed on the back side. The production is almost invisible. The first display is displayed in the second display mode in which the second error display is displayed in a state where the effect that the background animation of the background effect is turned back is further executed. Have

  FIG. 23 (l) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle right symbol display area 208c while the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the reduced symbol display areas 208a ′ to 208c ′ have disappeared. Is shown. The background animation of the background effect that is the first display is displayed in the first display mode that is in a stationary state. The second error display which is the second display is displayed in the second display mode in which the entire display is displayed.

  FIG. 23 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. Further, the first LED from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on, and it is informed that the number of the operation holding balls in the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is one.

  In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 4- “Decoration 2—Decoration 7” is stopped and the fourth symbol display area 920 stops and displays a blue fourth symbol (indicated by a right-up hatching in the figure) for notifying the deviation.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.

(Example 7)
FIG. 24 shows an example of effect display in Example 7 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 24A to 24B show the effect display states for each time point in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 24A to 24B are the same as those shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects, so that they have the same reference numerals. The description is omitted.

  24 (a) to 24 (b), the decorative symbol display area, the variable icon display area 800, the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the fourth symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each figure. Arrangement of 920 etc., change display or stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, change icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth figure, etc. are as shown in FIG. Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

  In FIG. 24A, a character image “general zone” is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect in front of the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and around the symbol display areas 208a to 208c and the special figure 1 hold icons 901 to 905. A state in which a red effect image is displayed as a pre-reading notice is displayed. At the same time as the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in which the character image “General Zone” is displayed, an effect image such as a red aura is displayed in the image display area. The display of the red effect image (shown by hatching in the form of a diagonal cross in the figure, hereinafter sometimes referred to as “effect”), which is the first display, is displayed in the image display area. It is displayed in the first display mode that is a mode. Since the effect display is displayed in front of the variation icon 700, the portion of the variation icon 700 overlapping the effect display is visually recognized in red under the influence of the effect display. Further, since a character image “general zone” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “general zone”) as a pre-reading notice is displayed in front of the special figure 1 hold icon display area, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 is displayed. The circular lower part of ˜905 is hidden in the “general zone”. Further, since the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 920 is displayed in front of the effect display, the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 920 is not visually recognized as red.

  FIG. 24B shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 3 to 4. A special figure 1 hold icon 907 (second display) is displayed above the fourth area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. The display of the hold icon 907 is displayed behind the effect display and overlapped with the effect display so that the display of the hold icon 907 is visually recognized as if it is colored due to the effect display. It is displayed in two display modes. Moreover, it may be visually recognized as if a red hold icon 907 is displayed as a pre-reading notice. A hold icon having a display form similar to the display form of the hold icon in the middle of being affected by the effect display may or may not be held in advance. Even if you do not have a hold icon with a display mode similar to the display mode of the hold icon in the middle of being affected by the display of the effect, you can make the player who is playing for the first time have the illusion that a hot look-ahead notice has been made There is. Although not shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, a mode in which the effect display is not displayed in the image display area is the third display mode, and the display of the hold icon 907 is the effect display. A mode in which a white circle is displayed without being affected is a fourth display mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.

(Example 8)
FIG. 25 shows an example of effect display in Example 8 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 25A to 25H show the effect display states at each time point in time series. The configurations shown in FIGS. 25A to 25H are the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment and have the same operations and effects, so that they have the same reference numerals. The description is omitted.

  25 (a) to 25 (h), the decorative symbol display area, the variable icon display area 800, the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the fourth symbol display area in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each figure. Arrangement of 920 etc., change display or stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, change icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth figure, etc. are as shown in FIG. Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 25A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is executed, and in the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure d (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is informed that the number of the operation holding balls in the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is one, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 has the operation shown in FIG. It is informed that the number of holding balls (the holding number in FIG. 2) is zero.

  In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the fourth symbol display region 920, the fourth symbol variation display is executed. In the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 holding icon display area, a special figure 1 holding icon 901 is displayed in a white circular default display mode. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 700 for the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 700 is a white circle. Hereinafter, the display of the circular contour image constituting the special figure 1 hold icon 901 may be referred to as a first display, and the display of the content image displayed inside the circular contour may be referred to as a second display.

  In the effect display area 208d, an animated image (hereinafter referred to as “hold”) of a character image of Yoshimune (hereinafter referred to as “Yoshimune”) carrying a sword from the lower right hand of the image display area toward the special figure 1 hold icon 901. The icon display mode change animation ”is displayed. The hold icon display mode change animation is an animation that can change the display mode of the hold icon.

  25 (b) to 25 (h) show a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is continuing and the hold icon display mode change animation is continuing. FIG. 25B shows a state where Yoshimune, who has run toward the special figure 1 hold icon 901, stops near the special figure 1 hold icon 901 and swings up his sword. FIG. 25C shows a state in which Yoshimune is slashing the special figure 1 hold icon 901. FIG. 25D is a first display mode in which the outline display, which is the first display of the special figure 1 hold icon 901 cut by Yoshimune, is transformed from a circular shape to a vertically long ellipse. Is displayed. Even in a period in which the frame display as shown in FIG. 21 is not performed in the shake state, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 may be displayed in an elliptical shape. The display in which the special figure 1 hold icon 901 is deformed may be the same display as the display shown in FIG. 21 or may be a display that is not the same but a similar display. FIG. 25 (e) shows a state where the contour shape of the special figure 1 holding icon 901 is further deformed into a horizontally long ellipse of the first display mode, and the contour is gradually thinned. Yoshimune is about to leave the sword away from the special figure 1 hold icon 901. In FIG. 25 (f), the surface inside the outline of the special figure 1 holding icon 901 changes to red (indicated by a left-upward hatching in the figure), and a character image of “heat” (hereinafter “ A state in which the display of “sometimes referred to as“ heat ”” is displayed in the second display mode is shown. The display of the contour of the special display 1 hold icon 901 of the first display maintains a horizontally long oval shape in the first display mode, and the shape of the “heat” display of the second display is the second display Similar to the shape of the special figure 1 hold icon 901 as a display mode, it is displayed in a horizontally long shape. FIG. 25G shows a first display mode in which the contour shape of the special figure 1 hold icon 901 is returning from an ellipse to a circle. In accordance with the change in the outline shape of the special display 1 holding icon 901 in the first display mode, the shape changes from the horizontally long shape to the normal shape in the second display mode of the “heat” display in the second display mode. I am doing. In FIG. 25 (h), after a predetermined time elapses, the contour shape, which is the first display of the special figure 1 hold icon 901, returns to a completely circular shape and becomes the third display mode. The shape of “heat” in FIG. 5 is also a fourth display mode in which the shape is completely changed to a normal “heat” shape.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.

Example 9
FIG. 26 shows an example of effect display in Example 9 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 26A to 26N show the effect display states for each time point in time series. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 26A to 26H is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. 16A of the first embodiment and has the same operations and effects, so that the same reference numerals are used. The description is omitted.

  Also, a decorative symbol display region, a variable icon display region 800, a special symbol 1 hold icon display region, and a fourth symbol display region in the image display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each of FIGS. 26 (a) to (n). Arrangement of 920 etc., change display or stop display of decorative symbols in a predetermined display area, change icon 700, special figure 1 pedestal 900, hold icon 901, display of fourth figure, etc. are as shown in FIG. Since it is the same, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 26A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. Further, the special figure d (offset symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is informed that the number of the operation holding balls in the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is one, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 has the operation shown in FIG. It is informed that the number of holding balls (the holding number in FIG. 2) is zero.

  In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 2—decoration 4” indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. In the area 920, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 holding icon display area, a special figure 1 holding icon 901 is displayed in a white circular default display mode. Further, in the fluctuation icon display area 800, an erasing animation of the fluctuation icon 700 is executed.

  FIG. 26 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 920 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Also, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become zero. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Further, when the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, in the variable icon display area 800 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the interval between the hold and change icons is changed. The moving animation is executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 becomes the change icon 801 and moves to the change icon display area 800. FIG. 26B shows a state in which the fluctuation icon 801 has completed the movement into the fluctuation icon display area 800 and the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons has ended. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is a white circle like the special figure 1 hold icon 901.

  FIG.26 (c) has shown the state where the special figure 1 variable game was complete | finished. The special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 8-decoration 1-decoration 9” indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. In the 4th symbol display area 920, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, an erase animation of the variation icon 801 is displayed. At this time, since the suspension of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, even if a predetermined stop display period elapses, the next special figure variable game is not started and enters a non-variable state. Also, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 gradually descends vertically from the special figure 1 holding icon display area based on the fact that the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 0 at the start of the special figure 1 variable game. The display of the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation is started.

  FIG. 26D shows a state in which the special figure variation game is in a non-variable state, the erasure animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is finished, and the special figure 1 pedestal withdrawal animation is being displayed. In the special figure 1 pedestal retreat animation, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is further lowered and the lower half is retreated outside the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The display of the deletion animation of the variation icon 801 is finished, and the deletion of the variation icon 801 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 is completed.

  FIG. 26 (e) shows a state in which a game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 in a state where the special figure variable game is not changed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the special figure 1 hold has increased from 0 to 1. The special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation will be stopped based on the fact that the special figure 1 suspension has been increased from 0 to 1 while the special figure 1 pedestal withdrawal animation is displayed. Instead, the special figure 1 pedestal return animation will be displayed instead. Is done. In addition, the display of the increase animation of the special figure 1 is started based on the increase of the special figure 1 hold. The special figure 1 pedestal 900 display (first display) in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation is the first display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 gradually rises and appears in the special figure 1 holding icon display area. Is displayed. The display (second display) of the special figure 1 holding icon 903 in the special figure 1 holding increase animation is as follows. The special figure 1 holding icon 903 gradually increases the display size while the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is displayed. Is displayed together with the special figure 1 pedestal 900 from below, passes through the front surface of the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 and reaches the upper side of the first area. The display form of the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is a white circle.

  FIGS. 26 (f) to (h) show a state in which the special figure variation game is in a non-fluctuating state and is displayed from the display of the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the special figure 1 holding increase animation to the end. FIG. 26 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 pedestal return animation and the special increase animation of special figure 1 are being displayed. In the special figure 1 pedestal return animation, the special display 1 pedestal 900 is further raised, and the first display is made in the first display mode in which the entire special figure 1 pedestal 900 appears in the special figure 1 holding icon display area. ing. In the reserved increase animation in FIG. 1, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 rises together with the special figure 1 pedestal 900 while further increasing the display size, and passes through the front of the first region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. The second display is performed in the second display mode. In the special figure 1 holding icon 903, the upper half of the circular outline is located above the first area of the special figure 1 pedestal 900. FIG. 26 (g) shows a state in which the display of the special figure 1 pedestal return animation is finished and the reserved increase animation of the special figure 1 is being displayed. The first display is made in the first display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 1 holding icon display area. In the reserved increase animation of FIG. 1, the special figure 1 hold icon 903 further increases the display size, and about 2/3 of the circular outline is positioned above the first region of the special chart 1 pedestal 900. The second display is made in two display modes. FIG. 26 (h) shows a state in which the display of the reserved increase animation in FIG. 1 is completed following the display of the special chart 1 pedestal return animation. In the second display mode in which the display of the special increase animation of FIG. 1 is finished and the special figure 1 hold icon 903 is stopped at a predetermined position above the first area of the special figure 1 base 900 in the second display mode. The display is made.

  FIG. 26 (i) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The special symbol 1 display device 212 executes the special symbol 1 variation display, the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c execute the decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth symbol display region 920 displays the fourth symbol variation display. It is running. Also, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has become zero. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Further, when the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, in the variable icon display area 800 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the interval between the hold and change icons is changed. The moving animation is executed. FIG. 26 (i) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon 803 has completed the movement into the fluctuation icon display area 800, and the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons has ended.

  FIG. 26 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The special figure G (out of symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. Further, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is informed that the number of the operation holding balls in the special figure 1 (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is zero.

  In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 1-decoration 8-decoration 9” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is stopped and displayed. In the area 920, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the disengagement is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, an erase animation of the variation icon 803 is executed. At this time, since the suspension of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, the next special figure variable game is not started even if a predetermined stop display period elapses, and it becomes a non-variable state.

  FIG. 26 (k) shows a state in which the display of the special figure 1 pedestal withdrawal animation is started. Special Figure 1 Based on the fact that the number of reserved figure 1 is 0 at the beginning of the floating game, Special Figure 1 pedestal 900 gradually descends from the Special Figure 1 reserved icon display area and evacuates. The special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation is displayed.

  FIGS. 26 (l) to (n) show a state in which the special figure variation game is in a non-variable state, from the display of the special figure 1 base evacuation animation to the end. FIG. 26 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 pedestal withdrawal animation is being displayed. In the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation, the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is further lowered, and the lower half of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is retracted outside the special figure 1 holding icon display area in the first display mode. Is displayed. FIG. 26 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 pedestal withdrawal animation is being displayed. In the special figure 1 pedestal retraction animation, the special display 1 pedestal 900 is further lowered, and the first display is performed in the third display mode in which almost the whole is retreated out of the special figure 1 holding icon display area. FIG. 26 (n) shows a state where the display of the special figure 1 pedestal withdrawal animation has been completed. In the special figure 1 pedestal evacuation animation, the special display 1 pedestal 900 is further lowered and the first display is made in the third display mode in which the whole is completely evacuated outside the special figure 1 holding icon display area. . In addition, during the period in which the first display is displayed in the third display mode, there is no special figure 1 hold, so the special figure 1 hold icon 903 as the second display is not displayed (fourth display). Display mode).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 26 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A game machine comprising at least one display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of displays,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, display of special figure 2 pedestal 910),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, display of special figure 2 hold icon 911, display of special figure 2 hold icon 913),
The display means displays at least the first display in a first display mode (for example, a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is gradually lowered from the upper right side of the image display area in the special figure 2 pedestal moving animation). Display means that can be displayed,
The display means can display at least the first display in a third display mode (for example, a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 holding icon display area). Means,
The display means displays the second display in a second display mode (for example, a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is gradually lowered from the upper right side of the image display area in the hold increase animation 1 of the special figure 2. ) At least display means that can be displayed,
The display means displays the second display in a fourth display mode (for example, the special figure 2 holding icon 913 is displayed on the left side of the special figure 2 base 910 in the special animation 2 of the special figure 2 and the display position is changed. A display means that can be displayed at least in a display mode in which the center is fixed without rotating and rotated about the rotation axis)
The first display mode is different from the third display mode (for example, the first display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 descends from the upper right side of the image display area. Yes, the third display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position),
The second display mode is different from the fourth display mode (for example, the second display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 descends from the upper right side of the image display area. The fourth display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 913 is fixed without rotating from a predetermined position and is rotated about the rotation axis)
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode. To do.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to pay attention to the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.
In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is
A game machine comprising at least one display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of displays,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, display of special figure 2 pedestal animation),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, display of special figure 2 hold animation 1),
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first display mode (for example, special figure 2 pedestal movement animation),
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a third display mode (for example, special figure 2 pedestal stop animation),
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a second display mode (for example, the reserved increase animation 1 in FIG. 2),
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a fourth display mode (for example, special figure 2 hold icon stop animation 1),
The first display mode is different from the third display mode (for example, the first display mode is a state display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is moving, and the third display mode. The mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 maintains a stop at a predetermined position),
The second display mode is different from the fourth display mode (for example, the second display mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 is moving, and the fourth display mode is the fourth display mode. The mode is a display mode in which the special figure 2 hold icon 911 maintains a stop at a predetermined position),
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode. To do.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display.

(2) The pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, display of the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display area 920),
The display means is a display means capable of displaying at least the third display in a fifth display mode (for example, a display mode in which the 4th symbol of the 4th symbol display area 920 is variably displayed),
The display means displays the first display (for example, the display of the special figure 2 pedestal 910) in the first display mode (for example, the special figure 2 pedestal moving animation and the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is located on the upper right side of the image display area. Display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when displaying in a display mode gradually descending from
The display means displays the first display in the third display mode (for example, a display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 holding icon display area). In this case, the third display is display means capable of displaying at least the fifth display mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, by enabling the display of the third display that is not affected by the first display, it is possible to display the first display and the first display by comparison with the third display. In some cases, the player can be focused on the second display. In addition, by making it possible to display a third display that is not affected by other displays, information relating to profits such as a lottery result may be reliably transmitted to the player.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
From the first display mode (for example, the position where the first region of the special map 2 base 910 is first displayed after the special map 2 base movement animation is started), the third display mode (for example, the special map 2). The change amount (movement distance) to the special map 2 pedestal 910 at the end of the pedestal movement animation (the display position of the first region) is the first change amount
From the second display mode (for example, the position where the special map 2 hold icon 911 is displayed on the display after the reserved increase animation 1 of the special map 2 is started) from the fourth display mode (for example, the special map 2 The change amount (movement distance) to the special figure 2 hold icon 911 display position at the end of the hold increase animation 1 is the second change amount.
The first change amount is the same change amount as the second change amount (for example, the distance from the upper end side is equal).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the amount of change from the first display mode of the first display to the third display mode and the second display mode of the second display to the fourth display mode. By making the change amount of the same the same, it becomes possible to give a sense of unity to the entire display change displayed on the display means, and the player may be more focused on the display means.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display mode (for example, the display mode in which the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is raised vertically to a predetermined position in the special figure 1 holding icon display area in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation). At least a part of one display (for example, the display of the special figure 1 pedestal 900) has at least low visibility when the display means is in the first state,
In the first state, the display means displays the second display mode (for example, the special figure 1 holding icon 903 in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation 1 and the special figure 1 pedestal 900 in the special figure 1 pedestal return animation). The second display (for example, the display of the special figure 1 holding icon 903) is at least in a display mode in which the front of the first region of the special figure 1 pedestal 900 is raised from below the special figure 1 pedestal 900. It is a state being displayed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, there is a case where the player can be focused on the second display rather than the first display by displaying the second display on the first display. is there. By reducing the visibility of at least a part of the first display, the player may be interested in the part, and the first display and the second display may be noted.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display (for example, display of special figure 2 pedestal animation) is a display including at least a first animation display (for example, display of special figure 2 pedestal animation),
The second display (for example, display of special figure 2 hold animation 1) is a display including at least a second animation display (for example, display of special figure 2 hold animation 1),
The first animation display is at least an animation display different from the second animation display,
The display means switches the display mode of the first display from the first display mode (for example, special figure 2 pedestal movement animation) to the third display mode (for example, special figure 2 pedestal stop animation). Further, it is a display means capable of continuously displaying the first animation display,
The display means changes the display mode of the second display from the second display mode (for example, the reserved increase animation 1 in FIG. 2) to the fourth display mode (for example, the special map 2 reserved icon stop animation 1). ), The display means is capable of continuously displaying at least the second animation display.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, even when the display mode of the first display and the second display is switched, the display of each animation is continued, so that the display mode is different. In some cases, it is possible to easily convey to the player that the display is the same and that the display is not different.

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means displays the first display (for example, the display of the special figure 2 pedestal 910) in the first display mode (for example, the special figure 2 pedestal moving animation and the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is located on the upper right side of the image display area. The second display (for example, the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 911, the display of the special figure 2 hold icon 913) when the display is performed in the display mode gradually descending from the fourth display. Aspect (for example, the special figure 2 hold icon 913 is displayed on the left side of the special figure 2 pedestal 910 in the reservation increase animation 2 of the special figure 2, and the display position is fixed without moving and the center is rotated about the rotation axis. Display means) which does not display in the display mode),
The display means displays the first display in the third display mode (for example, the display mode in which the special figure 2 pedestal 910 is stopped at a predetermined position in the special figure 2 holding icon display area). In this case, the second display is changed to the second display mode (for example, a display mode in which the special figure 2 holding icon 911 gradually descends from the upper right side of the image display area in the holding increase animation 1 of the special figure 2). It is a display means which does not display in (5).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having such a configuration, the display mode of the second display changes depending on the display mode of the first display, and thus the player may be able to focus on the first display. In addition, since the display mode of the first display can be estimated from the display mode of the second display, it is necessary to pay attention to all of the plurality of displays even when a plurality of displays are performed on the display means. In some cases, it is efficient because it is sufficient to pay attention to only one display. In addition, by limiting the display period of the first display, the period during which the player should pay attention to the first display is limited, so that the player can be entertained without unnecessarily tiring the player There is.

  Moreover, you may make it the several display from which a display mode differs differ include the image produced | generated from the same data. For example, image data may be generated (developed in VRAM) from data stored in the image ROM. Further, the generated image data may be processed to perform the first display and the second display. In addition, the first display displayed in the first display mode and the second display displayed in the third display mode may include image data generated from the same image data. . Further, the image data may have different aspects. By doing so, there is no need to have data for each different display mode, and there is a case where the limited capacity of the game machine is not compressed.

  Further, the second display may consist of various displays. For example, the second display may consist of a hold icon. The second display may consist of a changing symbol display. The second display may consist of error notification. The second display may include a notice display based on the lottery result of the change. The second display may consist of a pre-reading notice display based on the lottery result of the variation after the variation. The second display may be an operation promotion display (button press, ball removal, right strike, etc.) that prompts the player to operate the operation means. The second display may be a warning display (a prepaid card forgetting prevention notification) that alerts the player. By doing so, there are cases where the display style of the display related to the game can be improved and the interest of the game table can be improved by having a case where it changes and a case where it does not change.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made.
For example, for all displays described in the above embodiments, there may be displays that are not affected by other displays. For example, the second display may be displayed while the first display is not displayed. In addition, when the second display is displayed while the first display is displayed and when the second display is displayed while the first display is not displayed, the display position and shape of the second display, etc. May change. Further, the second display may be composed of a hold icon (an icon displayed corresponding to the number of times of operation of the symbol variation display means).

  In addition, another display that hides at least a part of one or both of the first and second displays may be displayed. Further, the display may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize one or both of the first and second displays. In addition, when the second display consists of an animation display and the display position changes during the animation display, the first display is not displayed when the second display is displayed during the first display. The second display may be moved differently from the case where the second display is displayed. Also, by displaying the second display first and displaying the first display during the second display, the second display is faded out of the screen while the new second display is displayed in the screen. You may fade in.

  In addition, when the display mode of the second display is changed with the change of the display mode of the first display, the display mode may not be changed for a display that may cause a problem if the player misunderstands. Further, alternative display may be newly performed while changing the display mode. For example, a mini-variable symbol displayed on the upper right may be added to the symbol that is fluctuating in the second embodiment. Further, the display mode of the display that is displayed based on the player's operation (the display in which the player intentionally operates the operating means in order to see the display) may be changed by another display. For example, the display after the button is pressed in the third embodiment (particularly, a notice display indicating what will be out of the treasure chest) may be changed.

  In addition, a premiere notice may be displayed as a second display that is affected by the first display. In particular, it is preferable that the second display is influenced by the first display and the display mode is changed, so that the player can recognize the display content of the base immediately. For example, a player who can be noticed by a skilled player but difficult for an amateur is preferable. A plurality of second displays that are affected by the first display may be displayed. That is, the cut display is the first display, the button image and the treasure box display is the second display (part 1), the large family crest is the second display (part 2), and the second display (part 1). The first display gradually decreases the visibility, but the second display (part 2) may gradually increase the visibility by the first display. The display contents of the second display (part 1) and the second display (part 2) may or may not be related.

  Moreover, a shake expression may be performed as the first display. The shake expression freely transforms the display and gives a sense of perspective. In addition, when displaying the first display as a plurality of second displays while displaying a plurality of errors, the second display of the other is affected while the second display of one is affected. Does not have to be affected. Regarding ball-out errors with small disadvantages to game shops and players (possibility of disadvantages and disadvantages themselves), the influence of the first display will affect the game stores and players while changing the display mode. The display of the illegal winning error having a large disadvantage to the player may be continued without being affected by the first display.

  In addition, there may be a display in which the display priority order cannot exist. For example, before being affected by the first display, although the ball removal error display has a higher display priority than the hold display, only the ball removal error display is affected by the first display, May not be affected by the first display. Moreover, not only the above-mentioned shape and position, but also by receiving the influence of the first display, the display form of the second display has the same appearance (similar to another display form not affected by the first display). (It may look different). In the above embodiment, a red hold icon may be displayed when not affected by the first display, and the second display affected by the first display is the default (white) hold. If it is an icon, it looks similar to the red hold icon.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the configuration common to the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The description of the control system is omitted.

  FIG. 27A shows an example of the pre-reading notice lottery table used when the prefetching notice lottery is performed in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. The prefetch lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a prefetch result information command including prefetch result information from the main control unit 300, and a display mode of a hold icon indicating a hold corresponding to the prefetch result by the prefetch notice lottery Is determined. The pre-reading notice lottery table shown in FIG. 27A includes items of “prefetching notice mode”, “big hit”, and “out”.

  The “prefetching notice mode” in the left column of the figure indicates the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. “White” indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a white circle, “Black” indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a black circle, and “Heat” indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is in a circle. “Heat” indicates that the character is drawn. “White → Black” indicates that a change animation (details will be described later) is executed in which the display state of the hold icon changes from a white circle to a black circle. “Black → Heat” indicates that a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed from a black circle to a mode in which “Heat” is drawn in a circle. In the present embodiment, the default display mode of the hold icon is a white circle. If the prefetch result includes undetermined information, the hold icon indicating the hold corresponding to the prefetch result may be displayed in the default display mode without executing the prefetch notice lottery.

  The “big hit” in the middle row in the figure indicates a prefetch lottery random number obtained from a prefetch lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the prefetch notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the prefetch result is a big hit. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the prefetch notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each prefetch notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 27A, when the prefetching notice result is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each prefetching notice mode is 80% for “white”, 2% for “black”, and “heat”. 7%, “white → black” is 3%, and “black → heat” is 8%.

  In the right column of the figure, “missing” indicates a prefetch lottery random number acquired from a prefetch lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the prefetching notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the prefetching result is missed. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the prefetching notice mode (that is, equal to the selection probability of each prefetching notice mode) to be compared is shown. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), in the case where the prefetching notice result is out of order, the distribution ratio of each prefetching notice mode is 94% for “white”, 2% for “black”, and “heat”. 1%, “white → black” is 2%, and “black → heat” is 1%.

  FIG. 27B shows an example of a lottery table for a notice at the start of change (after the big hit determination) used when the notice lottery is performed in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Is shown. The notice lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command from the main control unit 300, and the notice effect type for the special figure variation game being executed is determined by the notice lottery. The lottery table for notice at the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 27B includes items of “notice mode”, “big hit”, and “out”. The “notice mode” in the left column in the figure indicates a mode of a notice that is executed using the decorative symbol display device 208 or the effect movable body 990. “Logo drop” indicates that the announcement movable body 990 moves downward, and “Rotation” indicates that the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates. "Logo drop + rotation" indicates that the presentation movable body 990 moves downward, and a notice is executed in a manner that the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates. This indicates that the notice effect is not executed.

  The “big hit” in the middle row in the figure indicates the notice lottery random number acquired from the notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the result of the determination is a big hit. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the notice result is a big hit, the distribution rate of each notice mode is 4% for “logo drop”, 7% for “rotation”, and “logo drop + rotation”. "Is 14% and" None "is 75%.

  In the right column of the figure, “missing” indicates the notice lottery random number obtained from the notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the result of the determination is wrong. The distribution ratio of the random number range of the notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the notice result is out of place, the distribution ratio of each notice mode is 3% for “logo drop”, 2% for “rotation”, and “logo drop + rotation”. "Is 1% and" None "is 94%.

  In addition, the notice mode of “logo drop” may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or not. For example, the distance that the effect movable body 990 moves downward may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or the speed at which the effect movable body 990 moves may be different. In addition, the notice mode of “rotation” may be different depending on whether it is a big hit or not. For example, in the case of a big hit, the image is rotated once, and in the case of a loss, the image is not rotated once and the rotation display is terminated and the normal display is restored. It should be noted that the image may be rotated once even in the case of dislocation. In addition, for example, the rotation angle of the image may be different, the angular velocity of the image rotation may be different, the rotation direction of the image may be different, The image to be rotated may be different. Further, the notice mode of “logo drop + rotation” may be made different as described above depending on whether it is a big hit or not.

Example 1
An effect example of Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Further, in FIG. 28 and each figure to be described later, examples of special figure 1 variable game effects in each example are shown in time series. In addition, fluctuations in the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are represented by white thick arrows.

  First, with reference to FIG. 28A, common points of FIG. 28 and each drawing described later will be described. As shown in FIG. 28A, a decoration frame f <b> 1 having a shape obtained by vertically inverting the “L” character is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the decoration symbol display device 208. A square-shaped special figure 1 reservation number display area 931 is provided in the upper left part of the decoration frame f1, and a square special figure 2 reservation number display area 932 is provided on the right side of the decoration frame f1. Below FIG. 931, a special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 is provided, and below that, a special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934 is provided. In the special figure 1 holding number display area 931, the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no holding in the special figure 1, "0" is displayed. In the special figure 2 holding number display area 932, the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no holding in the special figure 2, "0" is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 4 symbol display area 933, when the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the fact that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is notified as a change display of the 4 symbol "/". , “\” Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 1 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is stopped), the fourth symbol display is “-” or “◯”. An image is displayed. “-” Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place, and “◯” is the fourth graphic displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. is there. Note that “-” may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variable game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, when the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, the fact that the special figure 2 variable game is being executed is notified as a variable display of the fourth symbol "/". , “\” Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped), the fourth symbol display is “-” or “○”. An image is displayed. “-” Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, and “◯” is the fourth graphic displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. Note that “−” may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variable game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variable game.

  Below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a horizontally long rectangular decorative frame f2 is displayed. In the center of the decorative frame f2, a square-shaped variable icon display area 940 in which a part of the left and right frames is opened is provided. Note that the variation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 930 described later. This may facilitate identification of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is provided on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is provided on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from left to right. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth reserved orders in FIG. That is, a special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 that is the earliest (most recently stored) can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 1 hold can be displayed. Similarly, the special figure 2 reserved icon display area 960 is roughly divided into four areas, ie, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth special figure 2 holding ranks, respectively. That is, a special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 2 stored in the first area can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 hold can be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960, various animations representing movement of the hold icon are executed.

  A square-shaped navigation character display area 970 is provided on the left side of the special figure 1 hold display area 950. In the navigation character display area 970, a merchant character image h1 is displayed. The merchant character image h1 is used for an explanation effect such as a tutorial effect or a notice (notice of the change or a pre-read notice) effect.

  On the right side of the special figure 2 hold display area 960, a square-shaped effect custom state display area 980 is provided. In the effect custom state display area 980, “level 1 to 99” are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 100. The level of the effect custom state is set so as to increase when an effect with a low appearance rate is performed, for example. The level of the effect custom state may be set so as to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big win is won.

  FIG. 28A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the fourth symbol of the display mode of “-” for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol of the display mode of “-” that notifies that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 displays “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 indicates that the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

  FIG. 28 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 has become zero.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variation icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. . A right-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon 941 in FIG. 28B represents the moving direction of the variation icon 941.

  In FIG. 28C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is finished, and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. Is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is white. A default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle is shown by the increase animation of the hold icon. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 in FIG. 28B represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 952. Further, in FIG. 28C, a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. . The balloon image is an image used for the advance notice by the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 28D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 in FIG. 28D represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 953. In addition, an image of a character string of “chance?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1, and an effect that is expected to develop into a reach effect is executed. In addition, a substantially square-shaped hold change image h2 including an image of the character string “hold change” is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. . The hold change image h <b> 2 is an image that is displayed to notify that a prefetch notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon that is being displayed or that an effect of the change notice is executed. In this example, it is notified that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed is changed is executed by the hold change image h2. The hold change image h2 may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon in FIG. 1 is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon in FIG. 2 is changed. Alternatively, it may be a display that is displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is changed, The display may appear only when the hold icon and the variation icon of the special figure 2 are changed, or only when the hold icon of the special figure 1, the hold icon of the special figure 2 and the fluctuation icon are changed. It may be a display.

  FIG. 28 (e) shows that “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Indicates a state of being notified. Further, an erasing animation in which the fluctuation icon 941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 940 moves downward is displayed, and the fluctuation icon 941 is gradually deleted. FIG. 28E shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 changes from “white to black” is executed. In the change animation, a lightning strike image is displayed on the special figure 1 hold icon 952 from the hold change image h2, and the effect image is displayed overlapping the special figure 1 hold icon 951. The effect image is displayed in front of the special figure 1 hold icons 952 and 953, and the whole special figure 1 hold icon 952 and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 28 (f) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. Also, in FIG. 28 (f), the change animation ends, the hold change image h2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 28 (e) are deleted, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 changes from white circle to black circle. It has changed.

  FIG. 28 (g) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, the special figure 1 hold icon 952 becomes a change icon, and a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are started. ing. In FIG. 28 (g), a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d. .

  FIG. 28 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are finished. Further, in FIG. 28 (h), an image of a character string “dono-” is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1, and it is suggested that a character image h3 of the manuscript described later appears. Production is being performed. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 28 (i) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display area 208d, and a character string image of “Call me?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the character image h3 of the Tono. In addition, an image of a character string “Tono!” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 28J shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, a character string image of “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image h3. A string image is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 28 (k) shows that all images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotation target images” in this embodiment) are displayed on the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 1, the rotation center is 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player. Further, in FIG. 28 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image rotated 45 ° counterclockwise is taken in the direction rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and the vertical axis is taken in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. The aspect ratio of the case. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the rotated image after rotation is the aspect ratio when the horizontal axis is taken in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and the vertical axis is taken in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. . For example, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image when the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player is the rotation target image in a state where the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° clockwise when viewed from the player. It shows the ratio of the vertical length to the horizontal length. Further, the variation display of the decorative symbols in the fourth symbol and the middle symbol display region 208b displayed in the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol display region 933 is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

  The image to be rotated before rotation shown in FIG. 28 (j) is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208). The rotation target image shown in 28 (k) is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, a part of the character image h3, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. The Further, the variation display of the decorative symbols in the fourth symbol and the middle symbol display region 208b displayed in the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol display region 933 is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

  FIG. 28 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 28 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. In FIG. 28 (l), the entire rotation target image is displayed without being completely viewed.

  FIG. 28 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 180 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center from the state of FIG. Show. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation.

  FIG. 28 (n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In FIG. 28 (n), the hold change image h2 is displayed as the rotation target image during the execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the lord. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The on-hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 28 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, a part of the character image h3, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. The

  FIG. 28 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 28 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 28 (o), the rotation target image is not completely seen. FIG. 28 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which lightning occurs from the pending change image h2 and lightning strikes the fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle. The variation icon that has been struck by lightning overlaps the effect image, so that the entire variation icon is hidden by the effect image. FIG. 28 (o) shows that “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area. A special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area 950 appears as a result of an increase animation of the hold icon.

  FIG. 28 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 28 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, the on-hold change image h2 shown in FIG. 28 (o) and the effect image displayed so as to overlap the entire variation icon 941 are deleted, and a character of “heat” is drawn in a circle. The fluctuation icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 28 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 28 (p) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center (360 ° in total). FIG. 5 shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated once and returned to the original display state. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is returned to the original aspect ratio before the rotation. Next, in FIG. 28 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed. The downward arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon in FIG. 28 (r) represents the moving direction of the variation icon.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image is rotated, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change. A character image may be used as the rotation target image, and the presence of the character image may be enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image, and a strong impression may be given to the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated once (360 ° rotation), but the rotation target image may be rotated one rotation or more. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the rotation target image, the higher the big hit reliability may be set.

  The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio In some cases, the display image may be generated using the work area of the VRAM 436. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated using a random number, and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. There may be cases. In addition, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, or the rotation target image may be displayed so that the display area of the rotation target image is constant. The aspect ratio may change.

  In this embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center, but there are cases where an arbitrary position in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the rotation center. Also good. Further, the rotation target image may be rotated with a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position in the image display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be rotated as an axis. In this embodiment, the angular velocity of rotation of each image in the rotation target image is constant, but the angular velocity of rotation of each image may be varied according to the distance from the rotation center. For example, the angular velocity of rotation of each image may be decreased as the distance from the center of rotation increases. In this case, the player may be given an impression that the rotation target image is rotating faster than it looks. Further, in the present embodiment, an effect of changing the change icon is performed during the rotation display notice effect as a notice of the symbol change display being executed. For this reason, it may be possible to synergistically increase expectations for the special figure variation game being executed by performing these effects simultaneously.

(Example 2)
An effect example of Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 29 (a) to (r) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. FIG. 29 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 28 (a). Next, FIG. 29 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 28 (b). Next, in FIG. 29C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 is ended, and the variable icon display area 940 is displayed. The change icon 941 is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. FIG. 29 (c) shows a state immediately after the speech balloon image representing the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 29D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 29 (e) shows that “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Indicates a state of being notified. Next, FIG. 29 (f) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 28 (f). Next, FIG. 29 (g) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, showing the same state as FIG. 28 (g). Next, FIG. 29 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 have been completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 28 (h). Next, FIG. 29 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and the character image h3 of the lord is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the same as FIG. 28 (i). Indicates the state.

  FIG. 29 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, a character string image of “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image h3. A string image is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 29 (k) shows a decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, a hold-change image h2, a character image h3 of the lord, a balloon image representing a dialogue of the character image h3, a decorative frame f2, and a decorative frame f2. Images (holding icons, change icons, merchant character images h1, etc.) displayed in the balloon, and balloon images representing the lines of the merchant character images h1 (hereinafter referred to as “rotation target images” in this embodiment). Shows a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player. Also, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in Example 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative frame f1 and the image displayed in the decorative frame f1 (reserved number display, first display) Rotation display of 4 symbol images (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as “non-rotation target images” in the present embodiment) is not executed, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotation target image does not change. The non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only some of the non-rotation target images are displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

  The rotation target image before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. The target image is displayed with an aspect ratio adapted to a screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, a part of the character image h3, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. The Further, the variation display of the decorative symbols in the fourth symbol and the middle symbol display region 208b displayed in the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol display region 933 is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

  FIG. 29 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 29 (k) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. In FIG. 29 (l), the entire rotation target image is displayed without being completely viewed.

  FIG. 29 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 180 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center from the state of FIG. 29 (l). Show. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation. In addition, the decorative frame f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative frame f2. The decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative frame f2, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative frame f2.

  FIG. 29 (n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 29 (m) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In FIG. 29 (n), the hold change image h2 is displayed as the rotation target image during the execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the lord. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The on-hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 29 (n) is an image that is used to produce a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, a part of the character image h3, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so that they can be seen from the decoration symbol display device 208. The

  FIG. 29 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 29 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 29 (o), the rotation target image is not completely seen. FIG. 29 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which lightning occurs from the pending change image h2 and lightning strikes the fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle. The variation icon that has been struck by lightning overlaps the effect image, so that the entire variation icon is hidden by the effect image. In FIG. 29 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area. A special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area 950 shows a state in which an increase animation of the hold icon appears.

  FIG. 29 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 29 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed in an aspect ratio that matches a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, the on-hold change image h2 shown in FIG. 29 (o) and the effect image displayed so as to overlap the entire change icon are deleted, and the change of the aspect in which the characters “heat” are drawn in the circle is displayed. An icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 29 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 29 (p) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. FIG. 5 shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated once and returned to the original display state. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is returned to the original aspect ratio before the rotation. Next, in FIG. 29 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. This indicates a state in which there is a notification. Further, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed by moving the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward.

  Thus, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the non-rotation target image is not rotated when the rotation target image is rotated. For the non-rotation target image, the 4th symbol displayed in the 4th symbol display area and the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area are used. For this reason, it is made not to rotate the image which alert | reports information important for a player.

(Example 3)
An effect example of Example 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 30 (a) to 30 (r) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. FIGS. 30A to 30H show the same state as FIGS. 29A to 29H. Next, in FIG. 30 (i), a character image h3 is displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d. The character image h3 of the lord and the decorative frame f2 are displayed in an overlapping manner, and a part (chin portion) of the character image h3 of the lord is hidden by the decorative frame f2. FIG. 30 (i) shows the same state as FIG. 29 (i) except that the display position of the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 and the character image h3 is different. Next, FIG. 30 (j) shows the same state as FIG. 29 (j) except that the display position of the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 and the character image h3 is different.

  FIG. 30 (k) shows a balloon image representing the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image h3 of the shrine, and the speech of the character image h3 of the shrine (hereinafter, these images are referred to as “ ”May be referred to as a“ rotation target image ”)), showing a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player. Also, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment, the image displayed in the decoration frame f1, the decoration frame f1, the decoration frame f2, and the decoration frame f2 are displayed. The rotated image and the speech balloon image representing the speech of the character (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as “non-rotation target images” in this example) are not executed, and the non-rotation target image is not executed. The aspect ratio of does not change. The non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only some of the non-rotation target images are displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

  In FIG. 30 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The rotation target image before the rotation is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 30 (k). The aspect ratio of the target image is changed to an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In addition, the character image h3 of Tono displays the hidden chin portion. In addition, a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a is out of view in the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, FIG. 30 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 30 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 30 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 30 (l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation. Next, FIG. 30 (n) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 30 (m) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In addition, FIG. 30 (n) shows the decorative change image h2 displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c as the image to be rotated as the rotation target image during execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the character of the lord. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The on-hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 30 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

  FIG. 30 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 30 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. FIG. 30 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the change icon (change icon change animation) is executed. In the effect in the present embodiment, the lightning generated from the hold change image h2 is displayed so as to fall at a position different from the change icon to be changed. In addition, the fluctuation icon of the non-rotation target image changes from a black circle to a state in which “heat” is drawn in a circle at the timing when a lightning occurs from the hold change image h2 and the effect image is displayed. ing. In the present embodiment, since the changing variation icon is not hidden by the effect image, the changed variation icon can be visually recognized earlier than when the changing variation icon is hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 30 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 30 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4. The pending change image h2, the lightning image, and the effect image are deleted. Next, FIG. 30 (q) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 30 (p) about the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation and returned to the original state. Show. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is restored to the original aspect ratio. Next, in FIG. 30 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. This indicates a state in which there is a notification. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed.

  Thus, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the non-rotation target image is not rotated when the rotation target image is rotated. As the non-rotation target image, images such as the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area, the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area, the hold icon, and the variation icon are used. For this reason, it is made not to rotate the image which alert | reports information important for a player.

Example 4
An effect example of Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 31 (a) to 31 (r) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. 31 (a) to (i) show the same state as FIGS. 30 (a) to (i).

  FIG. 31 (j) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, a character string image of “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image h3. A string image is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed. FIG. 31 (j) shows a decoration frame f2, images displayed in the decoration frame f2 (pending icons, change icons, merchant character image h1, etc.), and a balloon image representing the lines of the merchant character image h1. It has been erased.

  FIG. 31 (k) is a balloon image (hereinafter, in this embodiment, showing the lines of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the pending change image h2, the character image h3 of the lord, and the character image h3 of the lord. "It may be referred to as a" rotation target image ") shows a state in which the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the player. Also, in the rotation display notice effect of the present example, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in Example 1 of the present embodiment, an image displayed in the decoration frame f1 and the decoration frame f1 (hereinafter, in this example, These images are sometimes referred to as “non-rotation target images”), and the rotation display of the non-rotation target images does not change. The non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only some of the non-rotation target images are displayed with priority over the rotation target image. In FIG. 31 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The rotation target image before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 31 (k). The aspect ratio of the target image changes in accordance with the aspect ratio of the screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4.

  FIG. 31 (l) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 31 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, in FIG. 31 (m), the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 31 (l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Indicates the state. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation. The decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol. Next, in FIG. 31 (n), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 31 (m) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center (total 225 ° rotation). Indicates the state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In FIG. 31 (n), the hold change image h2 is displayed as the rotation target image during the execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the hold change image h2g is a decoration displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed overlapping the symbol and the character image h3 of the shrine. The on-hold change image h2 displayed in FIG. 31 (n) is an image used for producing the notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

  FIG. 31 (o) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 31 (n) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. FIG. 31 (o) shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. The effect is different from the effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon during the rotation display notice effect in the example 1 and the example 2 of the present embodiment, and the thunder generated from the hold change image h2 is changed. It is displayed so as not to fall on the target fluctuation icon. In addition, the fluctuation icon of the non-rotation target image is displayed in a circle at the position of the fluctuation icon display area 940 before execution of the rotation display announcement effect at the timing when the effect image is displayed due to the occurrence of lightning from the hold change image h2. The variation icon 942 in the form of “heat” is temporarily overlapped with the on-hold change image h2 and “decoration 3”, and is placed on the near side in preference to the on-hold change image h2 and “decoration 3”. It is displayed. Therefore, the player can temporarily confirm that the change icon has changed.

  FIG. 31 (p) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 31 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In addition, the pending change image h2, the lightning image, the effect image, and the variation icon 941 are deleted. Next, in FIG. 31 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 30 (p) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. It shows the state of returning to the original. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is restored to the original aspect ratio. Further, the erased decoration frame f2, the image displayed in the decoration frame f2 (holding icon, change icon, merchant character image h1, etc.), and the balloon image representing the lines of the merchant character image h1 are displayed. Yes. Next, in FIG. 31 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. This indicates a state in which there is a notification. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed.

  As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image is rotated, images such as the hold icon and the variation icon that are important information for the player are not displayed. In some cases, the player can be focused on the rotation display of the rotation target image. Moreover, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, an effect of changing the variation icon is performed even though the variation icon is not displayed. For this reason, an unexpected surprise may be given to the player. In addition, there may be a case where the player's expectation can be satisfied by displaying only the variation icon that has temporarily changed during the effect of changing the variation icon. Further, the variation icon may be temporarily not displayed until the rotation display of the rotation target image is completed. In this case, since a predetermined time is required until the change icon is displayed after the change icon change animation is completed, the player's expectation may be amplified. Moreover, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, there may be an effect that the hold icon is changed even though the hold icon is not displayed.

(Example 5)
An effect example of Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a) to 32 (l) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 used in the present embodiment and later-described embodiments 6 to 9 includes a sub display device 209 mounted on the effect movable body 225. The effect movable body 225 can be moved up and down and rotated two-dimensionally in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). . The production movable body 225 may be configured to be able to operate three-dimensionally. In addition, the sub display device 209 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the sub display device 209, what is necessary is just the structure which can display various productions and various game information, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device, Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. The sub display device 209 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400 in the same manner as the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display device 209 may be controlled by the second sub control unit 500.

  FIG. 32A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 displays “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 indicates that the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. FIG. 32A shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 32A, the sub display device 209 (the effect movable body 225) is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 32 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 has become zero. When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variation icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. . In this way, in FIG. 32B, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is executed.

  FIG. 32C shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icon is finished and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. FIG. 32C shows a state where the character image h3 is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. In this example, the character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 32 (d) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 executes rotation display of the character image h3. FIG. 32D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character image h3 displayed on the sub display device 209 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “rotation target image” in this example) has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. It shows a state rotated 45 ° counterclockwise. In FIG. 32D, the rotation target image is displayed with the aspect ratio of the image changed. The rotation target image before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the sub display device 209), whereas the rotation target image shown in FIG. The aspect ratio of the image changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 32 (e) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 32 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 32 (f) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is in the state shown in FIG. 32 (e) or rotated 45 ° counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 (a total rotation of 135 °). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5.

  FIG. 32G shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 32F with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. ing. In addition, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before the rotation. Next, FIG. 32 (h) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) from the state shown in FIG. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 32 (i) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 32 (h) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 32 (j) shows a state in which the rotation target image is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 32 (e) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed to an aspect ratio adapted to a screen having an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, in FIG. 32 (k), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 360 °) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state of FIG. 32 (j). The state has returned to. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is returned to the original aspect ratio before the rotation. Next, in FIG. 32 (l), “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the sub display device 209, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. This indicates a state in which this is notified. Further, when the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, when the rotation target image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change. A character image is used as the rotation target image. In some cases, the presence of the character image is enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image, and an impact can be given to the player. Moreover, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated once (360 °), but may be configured to rotate one rotation or more. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the rotation target image, the higher the big hit reliability.

  Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio A display image may be generated from the data using the work area of the VRAM 436. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated using a random number, and uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. It may be generated. In addition, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, or the rotation target image may be displayed so that the display area of the rotation target image is constant. The aspect ratio may change.

  In this embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. However, there is a case where an arbitrary position in the image display area of the sub display device 209 is the center of rotation. Also good. Further, the rotation target image may be rotated about a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position in the image display area of the sub display device 209. You may rotate as a rotating shaft.

  In this embodiment, the angular velocity at which the rotation target image rotates is constant, but the rotation angular velocity of the rotation target image may be varied according to the distance from the rotation center. For example, the angular velocity of the rotation of the rotation target image may be decreased as the distance from the rotation center increases. In this case, the player may be given the illusion that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks.

(Example 6)
An effect example of Example 6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 33A to 33L show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 33A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 displays “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 indicates that the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. FIG. 33A shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at the front position in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub display device 209 has a hold display area 209b for displaying a hold number display image in the lower left part. In FIG. 33A, the hold display area 209b of the sub display device 209 displays “1” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 1 as the hold number display image.

  FIG. 33 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 has become zero. When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variation icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. A moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. . In this way, the moving animation between the hold / change icons is executed. In the hold display area 209b in the lower left part of the sub display device 209, “0” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 1 is 0 is displayed as the hold number display image.

  FIG. 33 (c) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icon is finished and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. FIG. 33C shows a state in which the character image h3 is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 33 (d) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 360 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, the character image h3 of Tono is rotated 360 ° counterclockwise. FIG. 33D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 moves from the front position at the center upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower position and rotates 45 ° counterclockwise about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. Shows the state. In addition, the hold display area 209 b at the lower left of the sub display device 209 has moved to the upper left of the sub display device 209. In addition, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. ° Rotated and displayed.

  FIG. 33 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 33 (d) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Is shown. In addition, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed with a rotation of 90 ° (a total rotation of 90 °). Next, in FIG. 33 (f), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 33 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation (total 135 ° rotation). Shows the state. In addition, the hold display area 209b in the upper left part of the sub display device 209 has moved to the upper right part of the sub display device 209. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. Rotated (total 135 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 33G, the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 33F with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center (180 ° total rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. Rotation (total 180 ° rotation) is displayed.

  FIG. 33 (h) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 33 (g) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Is shown. In addition, the hold display area 209 b in the upper right part of the sub display device 209 has moved to the lower right part of the sub display device 209. Further, the “0” image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. (Total 225 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 33 (i), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 33 (h) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center (total 270 ° rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is rotated by 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. (Total 270 ° rotation) is displayed.

  FIG. 33J shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 33I with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Is shown. In addition, the hold display area 209 b in the lower right portion of the sub display device 209 has moved to the original position in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the rotation center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. Rotated (total 315 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 33 (k), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 33 (j) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center (360 ° total rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209 b is 45 ° clockwise around the rotation center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. Rotated (total 360 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 33 (l), “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The state where it was notified is shown. Further, the sub-display device 209 deletes the character image h3, and the decorative symbol display device 208 deletes the variation icon 941 by moving the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward. Animation is running.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed by rotating the sub display device 209. In addition, when the sub display device 209 is rotated, the hold number display image displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. In addition, the hold display area 209b of the sub display device 209 is moved so as to be displayed at the left corner of the sub display device 209 when viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 209. For this reason, while the sub display device 209 is rotating, the hold number display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see. Further, in place of the rotation of the sub display device 209, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotated to produce an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub display device 209 simultaneously or continuously, there may be a case where an effect of rotating the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 209 is performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 209 may be fixed to the game board 200 so as not to move.

(Example 7)
An effect example of Example 7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (a) to (l) display the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 34 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 32 (a). Next, FIG. 34 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 32 (b). Next, FIG. 34 (c) shows the variation display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variation icons ends, and the variation icon display region A change icon 941 is displayed at 940. FIG. 34C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 moves downward, and the character image h3 is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 34 (d) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. FIG. 34D shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. In addition, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 209 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 209. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image h3 is visually recognized by the player so as not to rotate. Next, FIGS. 34E to 34K show a state where the sub display device 209 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 34 (e) to (k), the character image h3 is rotated and displayed clockwise at the same rotational speed as that of the sub display device 209. For this reason, while the sub display device 209 is rotating, the player's character image h3 is always viewed as not rotating. Next, in FIG. 34 (l), “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. This indicates a state in which there is a notification. Further, the sub-display device 209 deletes the character image h3, and the decorative symbol display device 208 deletes the variation icon 941 by moving the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 downward. Animation is running.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 at the same speed while the sub display device 209 is rotated. The character image is displayed in such a manner that the character image is not rotated as viewed from the player. For this reason, since the image displayed on the sub display device does not rotate although the sub display device 209 is rotating, it may be possible to give the player a surprise. In this embodiment, the character image is rotated in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209, but the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 209 is used. The character image may be rotated at a speed different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 209, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 209, or the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209 or The character image may be rotated at different speeds.

(Example 8)
An effect example of Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (a) to 35 (f) display the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 35 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 32 (a). Next, FIG. 35 (b) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved downward, and the character image h3 is displayed on the sub display device 209, and shows the same state as FIG. 34 (c). . The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. FIG. 35B-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. . The image data shown in FIG. 35 (b-1) has a princess character image h3 and a princess character image h4 at the lower left of the lord character image h3. It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for the advance notice with a high jackpot reliability. FIG. 35 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 35 (b-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35 (b). The generated display data is shown. A predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out from the image data shown in FIG. 35B-1 around the center of the image data as display data. FIG. 35B-3 shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 35C to 35E show a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. Rotated by 45 °. Moreover, the rectangle shown with the dashed-two dotted line in the figure of FIG.35 (c)-(e) has shown the position of the sub display apparatus 209 before rotation. In addition, the arrows shown in FIGS. 35C to 35E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

  FIG. 35C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35B with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. In the sub display device 209, a part of the character image h4 of the princess that was out of view from the sub display device 209 is displayed in the lower left part in a manner that is not rotated as viewed from the player. FIG. 35 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35 (c). The image data shown in (c-1) of FIG. 35 is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in (b-1) of FIG. 35 is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. FIG. 35C-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 35C-1 to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. FIG. 35 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 35 (c-2), and turns the sub display device 209 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 35 shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG.

  FIG. 35D shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35C with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower left part in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 35D-1 illustrates image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The image data shown in (d-1) of FIG. 35 is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in (c-1) of FIG. 35 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. FIG. 35D-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 35D-1 to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 35D-1 as the center. 35 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 35 (d-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35 (e). Fig. 35 shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in Fig. 35 (d).

  FIG. 35E shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. In the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h <b> 4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, and the other part is out of view from the sub display device 209. FIG. 35 (e) shows a state immediately before the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect ends. FIG. 35 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 35 (e-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 35 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). FIG. 35 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 35 (e-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 35 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 35 (c-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35 (d). A state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. FIG. 35 (e-3) shows the same state as FIG. 35 (c-3).

  FIG. 35 (f) shows that “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates a state of being notified. In the special symbol 1 and 4 symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” is displayed to notify that the result of the special symbol 1 variable game is a big hit. FIG. 35 (f) shows that the sub display device 209 returns to the original state by rotating 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35 (e) about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Shows the state. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed. FIG. 35 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 35 (f-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 35 (e-1) is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 35 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 35 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 35 (f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 35 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 35 (f-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35 (e). The state rotated 30 degrees is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. FIG. 35 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 35 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 while rotating the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of Tono is displayed in a mode that does not rotate when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 that has been overlooked on the sub display device 209 before the rotation display notice effect is executed is displayed on the sub display device 209. Is displayed on the sub display device 209. Also, the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 rotates more than a predetermined angle. For this reason, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 209, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 is displayed by the rotation of the sub display device 209, but the character is displayed in accordance with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. You may make it do. For example, when the big hit reliability is relatively low, the enemy character may be displayed. The princess character image h4 is displayed by rotating the sub display device 209 counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, whereas the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle. A character may be displayed. Further, the aspect ratio of the character image h3 and the princess character image h4 used for the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect.

Example 9
An effect example of Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (a) to 36 (f) display the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 36 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 32 (a). Next, FIG. 36 (b) shows the variation display of decoration symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variation icons is finished, and the variation icon display area A change icon 941 is displayed at 940. Also, in FIG. 36B, the sub display device 209 moves downward, and the character image h3 of the lord is displayed in the center of the sub display device 209, and the merchant character image h1 ′ is displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209. It shows the state that was done. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. The merchant character image h <b> 1 ′ is the same character image as the merchant character image h <b> 1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970. FIG. 36B-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. . The image data shown in FIG. 36 (b-1) has a princess character image h3 and a princess character image h4 at the lower left of the lord character image h3. It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for the advance notice with a high jackpot reliability. 36B-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 36B-1 to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36B. The generated display data is shown. A predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out from the image data shown in FIG. 36 (b-1) around the center of the image data as display data. Also, the display data shown in (b-2) of FIG. 36 is displayed at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in (b-1) of FIG. This is display data in which the merchant character image h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 36B-3 shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 36B-2. The merchant character image h1 ′ is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 36 (b-1), but the image data shown in FIG. It may be displayed with priority.

  FIGS. 36C to 36E show a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. Rotated by 45 °. Moreover, the rectangle shown with the dashed-two dotted line in the figure of FIG.36 (c)-(e) has shown the position of the sub display apparatus 209 before rotation. Also, the arrows shown in FIGS. 36C to 36E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

  FIG. 36C shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36B with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. . Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center as the center of rotation. In addition, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 that has been viewed from the sub display device 209 is displayed in a lower right side of the character image h1 'in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. FIG. 36 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 36 (c-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 36 (b-1) by 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 36C-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 36C-1 to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36C. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 36 (c-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 36 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 36 (c-1). This is display data in which merchant character images h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. FIG. 36 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 36 (c-2), and turns the sub display device 209 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36 (b). FIG. 36 shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG.

  FIG. 36D shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36C with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 36C as the sub display device 209 rotates. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise with the center as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed on the right side of the merchant character image h1 'in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 36D-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. The image data shown in FIG. 36 (d-1) is image data obtained by rotating the image data shown in FIG. 36 (c-1) by 15 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 36D-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 36D-1 to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36D. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. The display data shown in FIG. 36 (d-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 36 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 36 (d-1). This is display data in which merchant character images h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 36 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 36 (d-2), and turns the sub display device 209 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36 (c). FIG. 36 shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 209 in FIG.

  FIG. 36E shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. It is displayed in such a manner that it is rotated 15 ° clockwise around the center. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower right side of the character image h1 ′ as viewed from the player, and the other part is displayed from the sub display device 209. I'm out of sight. FIG. 36 (e) shows a state immediately before the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect ends. FIG. 36 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 36 (e-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 36 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. 36 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 36 (e-1) in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 36 (e-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 36 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 36 (e-1). This is display data in which merchant character images h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 36 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 36 (e-2), and moves the sub display device 209 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36 (d). The state rotated 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG.

  FIG. 36 (f) shows that “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates a state of being notified. In the special symbol 1 and 4 symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” is displayed to notify that the result of the special symbol 1 variable game is a big hit. 36F, the sub display device 209 returns to the original state by rotating 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36E around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. Shows the state. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1 ′ displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. It is displayed in such a manner that it rotates 30 ° clockwise around the center as the center of rotation and returns to its original position. Further, in the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed. FIG. 36 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36 (f). The image data shown in (f-1) of FIG. 36 is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in (e-1) of FIG. 36 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 36 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 36 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 36 (f). The generated display data is shown. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 36 (f-2) is displayed at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 36 (b-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image h1 ′ read from the ROM 406 is superimposed, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 36 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 36 (f-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36 (e). The state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 209 in FIG. FIG. 36 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 36 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image (donor character image h3 displayed on the sub display device 209 in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player while the sub display device 209 is rotated). And a princess character image h4) and a character image (merchant character image h1 ′) displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player. In the rotating sub display device 209, a character image displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player and a character image displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player are displayed simultaneously. There are cases where unexpected surprises can be given to the player.

(Example 10)
An effect example of Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (a) to (f) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 37 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 35 (a). Next, FIG. 37 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 35 (b). FIG. 37B shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is moved downward and the character image h3 is displayed on the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of Tono is an image used for a lateral movement display effect as a reach effect.

  FIGS. 37C to 37E show a state in which a lateral movement display effect as a reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves in the left-right direction in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the rectangle shown with the dashed-two dotted line in the figure of FIG.37 (c)-(e) has shown the position of the sub display apparatus 209 before the movement to the left-right direction.

  FIG. 37 (c) shows a state where the sub display device 209 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 37 (b). In addition, the character image h3 displayed in the center of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a manner that it moves to the right by the same distance as the left movement distance of the sub display device 209. Yes. For this reason, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. In the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h <b> 4 that has been overlooked in the sub display device 209 is displayed in the upper left part. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for the advance notice with a high jackpot reliability.

  FIG. 37 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 37 (c). Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in such a manner that it moves rightward by the same distance as the leftward movement distance of the sub display device 209. For this reason, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed so that it may be visually recognized so that it may not move, seeing from a player. In the sub display device 209, the entire princess character image h4 is displayed on the upper left.

  FIG. 37E shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a manner of moving to the left by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the right direction. For this reason, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the upper left part, and a part of the princess character image h4 is out of sight. FIG. 37 (e) shows a state immediately before the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect ends.

  FIG. 37 (f) shows that “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates a state of being notified. In the special symbol 1 and 4 symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” is displayed to notify that the result of the special symbol 1 variable game is a big hit. FIG. 37 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved back from the state shown in FIG. 37 (e) to the original state. Further, the character image h3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a manner of moving to the left by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the right direction. For this reason, the character image h3 of Tono is displayed in a mode in which it does not move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, the princess character image h4 is not displayed.

  Thus, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is moved in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 at the same speed while the sub display device 209 is moved laterally. The character image h3 of Tono is displayed in such a manner that the character image h3 does not move as viewed from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 that has been overlooked on the sub display device 209 before the lateral movement display notice effect is executed is displayed on the sub display device 209. Displayed on the sub display device 209 by the horizontal movement display. The princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 moves beyond a predetermined distance. For this reason, the player pays attention to the distance moved by the sub display device 209, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, a character combined with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed may be displayed. For example, when the big hit reliability is relatively low, the enemy character may be displayed. In addition, the princess character image h4 is displayed by moving the sub display device 209 to the left by a predetermined distance, whereas the enemy character of the lord is moved by moving the sub display device 209 to the right by a predetermined distance. May be displayed. In addition, the character ratio h3 and the princess character image h4 used for the lateral movement display notice effect in the present embodiment may change in aspect ratio during the lateral movement display notice effect.

(Example 11)
An effect example of Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (a) to (n) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 used in the present embodiment and in an embodiment 11 described later has an effect movable body 990. The effect movable body 990 can be moved and rotated two-dimensionally in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). . The effect movable body 990 may be configured to be able to move and rotate three-dimensionally. The effect movable body 990 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a character string image of “CR Daito Machine” is displayed on the surface.

  FIG. 38A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is wrong has been stopped. Has been. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 934, the 4th symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 displays “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 932 indicates that the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed. FIG. 38A shows a state in which the effect movable body 990 is located at the center upper position of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 38A, the effect movable body 990 is located at the initial position.

  FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the suspension of the special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 has become zero. In addition, when the special figure 1 hold is decreased by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 is being executed. In the hold display area 209b at the lower left of the sub display device 209, “0” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 0 is displayed.

  In FIG. 38C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is finished, and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. Is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is white. A default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle is shown by the increase animation of the hold icon. FIG. 38C shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 38D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 38 (e) shows a state in which an effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “logo drop effect”) in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward is executed. The logo drop effect is an effect used for a notice of “logo drop” shown in FIG. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image h5 is displayed across the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for a logo drop effect. In FIG. 38E, after the effect image h5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of the variable game is out of place. Further, when the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed. FIG. 38E shows a state in which a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle. Note that the logo drop effect shown in FIG. 38 (e) may be used as an effect combined with a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle, or is displayed in a black circle. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 may be used as an effect in combination with the display, or may be used alone as an effect of a pre-reading notice. Next, FIG. 38 (f) shows a state in which the effect movable body 990 has moved upward from the position shown in FIG. 38 (e) and returned to the original position shown in FIG. 38 (a). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is erased as the effect movable body 990 moves upward.

  FIG. 38 (g) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and shows a state immediately after the movement animation between the hold and change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 are started. FIG. 38 (g) shows a state immediately after the speech balloon image representing the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 38H shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are finished. Further, in FIG. 38 (h), an image of a character string “Tono” is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1, and it is suggested that a Tono character image h3 described later appears. Production is being performed. The character image h3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 38 (i) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a character image h3 of Tono is displayed in the lower right part of the effect display area 208d, and an image of a character string “Call me?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the character image h3 of the Tono. In addition, an image of a character string “Tono!” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image h1.

  FIG. 38J shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, a character string image of “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image h1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the line of the character image h3. A string image is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 38 (k) shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In FIG. 38 (k), all images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, referred to as “rotation target images” in this example) are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which the center of the region is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in FIG. 38 (k), the aspect ratio of the rotation target image is changed and displayed. The rotation target image before the rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 38 (k). The aspect ratio of the target image is changed to an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 4: 5. In addition, a part of “decoration 3” and a part of the navigation character display area 970 displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c are out of the decoration symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 38 (k), the effect movable body 990 moves to a position where it cannot be visually recognized by the player above the decorative symbol display device 208 in order to make the rotation display notice effect stand out.

  FIG. 38 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 38 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. Show. The rotation target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches a screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 209, the image to be rotated is not completely visible. FIG. 38 (l) shows a state in which a logo drop effect is performed in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position (not shown) in FIG. 38 (k) during the rotation display notice effect. . In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image h5 is displayed as a rotation target image. Also, in FIG. 38 (l), the effect image h5 is displayed in a mode rotated 90 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player, unlike the state shown in FIG. 38 (e), on the left side of the effect display area 208d. ing. Also, the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the state of FIG. 38 (l) is smaller than the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the state of FIG. 38 (e). It is a size. The same applies to the hold icon, the change icon, the merchant character image h1, and the effect image h5.

  FIG. 38 (m) shows that the image to be rotated is rotated 270 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 360 °) around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 38 (j). It shows the returned state. The aspect ratio of the rotation target image is restored to the original aspect ratio and the original size. In FIG. 38 (m), the effect movable body 990 moves upward from the position of FIG. 38 (l) and is positioned at the original position (position shown in FIG. 38 (a)). . In the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is deleted. Next, in FIG. 38 (n), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. This indicates a state in which there is a notification. Further, when the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed.

  As described above, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at the position behind the effect movable member 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decoration symbol display device 208. There is an effect to be displayed. The effect image displayed at the position behind the rendering movable body 2990 may cause the player to emphasize the operation of the rendering movable body 990, and is displayed at a position different from the position behind the rendering movable body 990. Since the effect image is displayed at an unexpected position, the player may be surprised unexpectedly. The big hit reliability may be different depending on the size, display color, and display position of the effect image.

Example 12
An effect example of Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (a) to 39 (f) display the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 39A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as FIG. Next, FIG. 39 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 38 (b). Next, FIG. 39C shows “decoration 2” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, showing the same state as FIG.

  FIG. 39D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a and the right symbol display area 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 39D shows a state in which the effect that the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position shown in FIG. 39C (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “logo drop effect”) is executed. Show. The logo drop effect is an effect used for a notice of “logo drop” shown in FIG. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image h5 is displayed across the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for a logo drop effect.

  FIG. 39 (e) shows a state in which the island simultaneous effect is started during the execution of the logo drop effect. The island simultaneous effect is an effect in which pachinko machines of the same model installed on the same island facility execute the same effect at the same timing. In the island simultaneous production of the present embodiment, a display in which the princess character image h6 is singing a song is displayed on the left part of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The displayed decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a character string image of “Island Simultaneous Production Start!” Is displayed to the right of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 39 (e) shows an effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the effect image h5 displayed in FIG. 39 (d) is at a position different from the position displayed in FIG. 39 (d). The state is displayed in a reduced size in the lower right. FIG. 39 (e) shows a state in which a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area 950 is black. A special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is displayed. Note that the logo drop effect of the present embodiment may be used as an effect suggesting that a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle may be performed, It may be used alone as an effect.

  In FIG. 39 (f), during the island simultaneous production, the effect movable body 990 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 39 (d) and returns to the original position (position shown in FIG. 39 (a)). Is shown. In addition, a character string image of “Island Performance” is displayed to the right of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the island performance is in progress. In addition, the effect image h5 that has been reduced and displayed in the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted, and the left middle right symbol display regions 208a to 208c that are reduced in the lower right portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed as “decoration 2”. “Decoration 4-Decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Further, when the variation icon 941 displayed in the variation icon display area 940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 941 is executed.

  Thus, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect image is displayed at a position behind the effect movable member 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the displayed state and the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at a position different from the back of the effect movable member 990 on the decorative symbol display device 208. There is a state. The state in which the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 on the decorative symbol display device 208 may give the player an unexpectedness. May be able to provide a topic. The big hit reliability may be different depending on the size, display color, and display position of the effect image.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39 again.

(A1)
A game machine having image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a sub display device 209),
The image display means may perform a rotation display of a first image (for example, Tono character image h3),
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIGS. 28J to 28Q or FIGS. 32C to 32K).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the first image is rotated and displayed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change, so the presence of the first image is amplified. In some cases, a strong impression may be given to the player. In addition, any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background design, or all of the images may be used as the first image. The image may be the first image.

(A2)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A1) above,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the hold icon or the hold number display) may not be rotated (for example, FIGS. 30 (j) to (q) or FIGS. 33 (c) to (c)). k)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(A3)
A gaming machine as set forth in (A2) above,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the fourth symbol) does not rotate (for example, see FIGS. 29 (j) to (q)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the rotation display of the first image is performed, the rotation display of the first image is emphasized because the rotation display of the second image may not be performed. Meanwhile, the player can make the second image visible to the player. In addition, there may be a case where any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the change icon, and the background design, or all of these images are used as the second image. May have a different image as the second image.

(A4)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A3) above,
When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, the princess character image h4) that has been cut off by the image display unit before the rotation display is performed is displayed on the image display unit by performing the rotation display. (See, for example, FIGS. 35 (b) to (d)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, an image that has been disregarded in the image display unit before the first image is rotated and displayed is displayed on the image display unit by the first rotation display. In some cases, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.

(A5)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A4) above,
When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, a decorative pattern) displayed on the image display unit before the rotation display is performed may be cut off by the image display unit by performing the rotation display. (See, for example, FIGS. 28 (i) to (k)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the image displayed on the image display unit before the first image is rotated and displayed is cut off on the image display unit when the first rotation is displayed. Because of this, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.

(A6)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A7)
The game stand according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

(B1)
Production movable body (for example, production movable body 990),
Image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game machine equipped with
When the effect movable body is operated in front of the image display means, the first state (for example, the effect image h5) is displayed in the first position (for example, FIG. 38 (e)). The display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 39 or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG.
The first position is a position behind the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 38 (e) or 39 (d)).
The first image is an effect image,
When the effect movable body is operated in front of the image display means, the second state in which the first image is displayed at the second position (for example, the display of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 38 (l)). Or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 39 (e).
The second position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 38 (l) or FIG. 39 (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, when the production movable body is operated in front of the image display means, the first image is located at a second position different from the position behind the production movable body. The effect image of the first image will be displayed at a position unexpected by the player, giving the player an unexpectedness. May be possible.

(B2)
A gaming machine as set forth in (B1) above,
In the first state, the first image may be displayed across the first position and the third position,
The third position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 38 (e) or 39 (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B3)
The game stand according to (B1) or (B2) above,
The size of the first image in the first state is a first size,
The size of the first image in the second state is a third size,
The third size is smaller than the first size (see, for example, FIGS. 38 (e) and (f) or FIGS. 39 (d) and (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the first image in the first state is different from the first image in the second state, so that the player can enjoy variations of the first image. There are cases where you can not.

(B4)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B3) above,
In the first state, a second image (for example, a decorative pattern) may be displayed in a first direction (for example, see FIG. 38 (e)),
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in a second direction (a direction rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the first direction) (see, for example, FIG. 38 (l)).
The first image is an image different from the second image,
The second direction is a direction different from the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B5)
The game stand according to (B4) above,
The size of the second image in the first state is a second size,
The size of the second image in the second state is a fourth size,
The fourth size is smaller than the second size (see, for example, FIGS. 38 (e) and (l)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the size of the second image in the first state is different from the size of the second image in the second state, so that the player can enjoy variations of the second image. There are cases where you can not. In addition, there may be a case where any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the change icon, and the background design, or all of these images are used as the second image. May have a different image as the second image.

(B6)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B7)
The game stand according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C1)
An image display unit (for example, a sub display device 209) capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game;
Driving means for driving the image display unit (for example, the movable body for production 225);
A game machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by driving the driving means,
In a period (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) in which the image display unit is moving in a first direction (a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit or a linear direction). The unit may display a first video (for example, video of Tono character image h3 or video of Princess character image h4),
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image (for example, Tono character image h3 or Princess character image h4) moves in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, an impact is given by the movement of the image display unit, and the display angle and the display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the movement period. May be able to perform operations that are not seen on a non-daily basis, allowing the player to forget the daily routine and concentrate more on the game. Further, the entire period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. In addition, with an effect as a trigger, the entire period of the period from when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period, or with an effect different from a certain effect as a trigger, A part of the period from when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period.

(C2)
The gaming machine according to (C1) above,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the first image.

  In the example according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the expression, outer shape, and the like of the first image (dono character image h3 and princess character image h4) are fixedly displayed. The outer shape or the like may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, FIG. 35 will be described as an example. The face of the palace that was not displayed in FIG. 35 (a) is displayed as a true face in FIG. 35 (b) and a little smile in FIG. An animation may be performed such that a full smile is shown at 35 (d), a little smile is returned at FIG. 35 (e), and a true face is returned at FIG. 35 (f). Further, the aspect in which the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the lord) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image h3 of the lord moves. Animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of the lines (change display from partial character string indicating the line to the entire character string, etc.), character and icon The color may be changed, the character or icon may be moved or displayed, or a combination of these may be included.

(C3)
The game stand according to (C1) or (C2) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction;
The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In a gaming machine having such a configuration, the first direction when the image display unit operates is triggered by a certain effect (for example, arrival of the timing for starting the image display unit operation effect during super reach). (For example, the left-facing direction) and other effects (for example, the timing of starting the effect by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether or not the probability change at the end of the big hit starts) The first direction when the display unit operates may be a different direction (for example, right direction). In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction instead of the opposite directions. In this case, the player can make the first image move or rotate faster than the image display unit moves or rotates. Is visible. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary feeling that cannot be obtained in a mode in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit further increases the speed. Rotating and moving can cause you to forget your everyday sensations and concentrate on the game.

(C4)
The game stand according to (C3) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction;
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the image display unit appears to move to the player, but the display position / display angle of the first image does not seem to move, so that it is unusual for the notification means. When it is possible to perform a normal operation, the notification itself by the image display unit display can play the same role as when it is not moving, and it is possible to achieve both the impactful operation and the notification There is. Further, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite directions, and the first speed and the second speed may be different. In this case, the first direction and the second direction may be different from the movement or rotation of the image display unit. One image is visually recognized by the player so as to move or rotate slowly. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary feeling that cannot be obtained in a mode in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is the image display unit. Since the movement and rotation are performed so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation of the game, it may be possible to forget a more everyday feeling and concentrate on the game. In addition, when the image display unit moves and rotates quickly with an emphasis on impact, by moving and rotating the first image gently, the notification itself by the image display unit display is close to when it is not moving, It may be possible to fulfill the role of notification.

(C5)
The game stand according to any one of (C1) to (C4) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including an aspect in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image h1 ′) is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C6)
The gaming machine according to (C5) above,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The gaming machine having this configuration may be configured not to display a second image that does not move in the first direction during the first period. That is, in the first period, since all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, the movement of the image display unit and the image is given a unified feeling and more impactful. There are cases where the production operation can be executed.

(C7)
The game stand according to (C5) or (C6) above,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode using the second image.

  In the example according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the expression, outer shape, and the like of the second image (merchant character image h1 ′) are fixedly displayed. The expression, outer shape, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 36, the merchant's face that was not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 36 (a) is displayed as a true face in FIG. 36 (b), and a little in FIG. 36 (c). The animation may be a steep face, a steep face in FIG. 36 (d), a slightly steep face in FIG. 36 (e), and a straight face in FIG. 36 (f). The aspect in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the animation display position does not move. Animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of the lines (change display from partial character string indicating the line to the entire character string, etc.), character and icon The color may be changed, the character or icon may be moved or displayed, or a combination of these may be included.

(C8)
The game stand according to (C3) or (C4) above,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in (C1) above means “rotating by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (C1) above means “the first image rotates in the first direction”.
The first direction is a rotation direction (for example, a circumferential direction) around the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C9)
The gaming machine according to (C8) above,
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by that.

(C10)
The game stand according to any one of (C1) to (C7) above,
“Moving by driving the driving unit” described in (C1) above means “moving linearly by driving the driving unit”.
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (C1) above means that “the first image linearly moves in the first direction”.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C11)
Symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c),
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 209) configured to include an image display capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game ;
First image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) different from the second image display means;
Driving means for driving the second image display means (for example, a movable body for production 225);
A game machine equipped with
The second image display means may move by driving the driving means,
A period (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) in which the second image display unit is moving in a first direction (a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the second image display unit or a linear direction). ), A first moving image (for example, a moving image of Tono character image h3 or a moving image of Princess character image h4) may be displayed on the second image display means.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which an image (for example, a merchant character image h1 ′) moves in the first direction,
The second image display means can execute a first rotation (for example, counterclockwise rotation) as the first direction (for example, see FIG. 36),
During execution of the first rotation, an image of an image (for example, the sub image shown in FIG. 36) moved in a second direction (for example, clockwise) opposite to the first direction (for example, counterclockwise). An image displayed on the display device 209 (except for the merchant character image h1 ′)) is displayed on the second image display means so that the player does not move in the first direction. (See, for example, FIGS. 36 (c) to (e)),
In a state before the second image display means performs the first rotation, an image of a part of the picture (hereinafter referred to as “first picture”) is displayed on the second image display means. Does not fit within the area, is not displayed on the second image display means,
The first display or the second display may be performed by rotating a predetermined angle in the first direction by the first rotation of the second image display means,
The first display is a display in which the first image (for example, the image of the enemy character) is within the display area of the second image display means as the image of the first pattern. (See, for example, paragraph “0478”),
The second display is a display in which a second image (for example, a princess character image h4) is contained in the display area of the second image display means as the image of the first pattern ( For example, see FIG.
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the first display is performed (for example, when the image of the enemy character is displayed when the big hit reliability is relatively low). When the second display is performed (for example, when an image of a princess character used for a notice with a high jackpot reliability is displayed), the jackpot symbol form is confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display. Cheap,
A game stand characterized by that.
(C12)
The gaming machine according to (C11) above,
In the first period, the second image display means moves in the first direction,
In the first period, the picture is moved to the second orientation,
A game stand characterized by that.
(C13)
The gaming machine according to (C12) above,
In the first period, the second image display means moves at a first speed in the first direction,
In the first period, the pattern moves in the second direction at a second speed,
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C14)
The game stand according to (C12) or (C13) above,
In the first period, the first image is displayed so as not to move in the first direction,
In the first period, the second image is displayed so as not to move in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C15)
The game stand according to any one of (C11) to (C14),
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C16)
The game stand according to any one of (C11) to (C15) above,
The second image display means can execute linear movement (for example, see FIG. 37).
A game stand characterized by that.
(C17)
The game stand according to any one of (C11) to (C16),
The position where the first rotation is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means (see, for example, FIG. 36).
A game stand characterized by that.
(C18)
The game stand according to any one of (C11) to (C17) above,
When the first rotation is performed, an image (for example, a character image h3) displayed on the second image display unit before the first rotation is performed is the first rotation. There are cases where the second image display means can be cut off by being performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(C19)
The game stand according to any one of (C11) to (C18) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(C20)
The game stand according to any one of (C11) to (C18) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The above-mentioned “the first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “the first image linearly moves in the vertical direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned “first image linearly moves in the first direction” may mean “first image linearly moves in the left-right direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of the left direction and the right direction. The above-mentioned “first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “first image linearly moves in an oblique direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of the upper left direction, the lower right direction, the upper right direction, and the lower left direction.

  A modification of the configuration described in the example according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, the driving means (the effect movable body 225) shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 moves in a combination of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, front and rear direction as viewed from the player). There may be. Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to include a plurality of image display units. Further, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. The image display unit may be equipped with an LED or a production movable body. Further, before the image display unit is rotated or moved, the production movable body is moved from the initial state to the movable state, and after the image display unit in which the production movable body is in the movable state performs the rotation operation or the movement operation. It may be configured such that the stop movable body is then moved to the initial state. In addition, during the symbol variation display, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display is more effective when the effect operation illustrated in FIG. 34 is performed than when the effect operation illustrated in FIG. 33 is performed. The mode may be configured to easily become a big hit mode, and when the effect operation of FIG. 33 is performed during the design variation display, the effect operation of FIG. 33 is performed. It may be configured such that the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display tends to be a big hit mode. In addition, when the effect operation of FIG. 33 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a big hit mode. When the effect operation of FIG. 34 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the big hit mode. 33 and 34 both show examples in which the same effect display is performed. However, when the sub display device shown in FIG. 33 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display device also rotates together. The effect visually recognized by the player is different from the effect visually recognized by the player so that the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated together when the sub display device shown in FIG. You may comprise so that it may become. For example, “One of the other effects” is an effect in which Tono fights the composer, and “The other effect in another effect” is an effect in which the princess dances. Also good. “One of the other effects” may be installed, one or more may be installed, or one of the “other effects” may be installed. Multiple types may be installed. In addition, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 33, the figure is more than the number of types of effects in which at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device rotate together. When the sub display device rotates as shown at 34, the player visually recognizes that at least a part (or all) of the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated together. You may be comprised so that the number of types may increase. Conversely, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 34, the player visually recognizes that at least part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device are not rotated together. When the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 33, at least a part (or all) of the images displayed on the sub display device rotate together rather than the number of types of effects to be produced. You may be comprised so that the number of types may increase.

  Also, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 33 and the example of the effect shown in FIG. 34 may be combined. For example, in a period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image is prevented from being rotated so that the image displayed on the sub display device can be viewed by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. In the next period (period B), the sub display device is rotated at a speed B (for example, 40 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or the whole of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed B ′ (for example, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed C ′ (for example, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. In the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated. At least part or all of the image is rotated in the other direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize that only the sub display device is rotating. Let In the next period (period E), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed E (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or the whole of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed E ′ (for example, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed F (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed F ′ (for example, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. During the period before the sub display device is rotated for the next period (period G), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so as to be visually recognized by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. Thus, as illustrated in the period A to the period D, as the sub display device rotates, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually shifts from the rotation of the sub display device. The sub display device is rotated, and a part of or all of the display of the sub display device is stopped so that the player can visually recognize the image, and a new sense of unity with the sub display device and the image is obtained. It may be possible to perform certain effects. Further, as illustrated in the period D to the period G, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device as the sub display device rotates. By causing the player to visually recognize the change as described above, it may be possible to perform a new sense of unity with the sub display device and the image. In these examples, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced during the periods A to D, and the sub display is performed during the periods D to G. Although the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, conversely, during the period A to D, the rotation speed of the sub display device is increased. The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased. During the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. You may comprise so that the difference in speed may be made small gradually. Also, here, the rotating sub display device and the image displayed on the rotating sub display device are illustrated, but the present invention is also applicable to the sub display device that moves linearly and the image that is displayed on the sub display device that moves linearly. Is also possible.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted. In the following description excluding FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, the side closer to the player with the pachinko machine 100 installed in the island facility of the game store is referred to as “front” (front, front side, front side, front end, etc.). In addition, the reverse is "rear" (back, rear, rear side, rear end, etc.), and the vertical upper direction as viewed from the player is "up" (upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and vice versa. ”(Downward, lower, lower end, etc.), the horizontal left when viewed from the player is“ left ”(left, left, left end, etc.), and vice versa (right, right, right, right end, etc.) ).

  FIG. 40 is a schematic front view of the game board 1000 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. A main liquid crystal unit 1001 is disposed in the center case at the approximate center of the game area 124 defined by the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204. A decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed at substantially the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 performs effects by driving the decorative symbol display device 208 and the lamp, and details will be described later.

  The game board 1000 of this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. About the general figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232, since these general figure starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 are arrange | positioned on the right side path | route, the entrance of the game ball which falls on the right side path | route Is relatively easy, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. With respect to the variable winning opening 234, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball that falls on the right path, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the left path, depending on the arrangement pattern of the game nails. In FIG. 40, the game nails are not shown. On the other hand, with regard to Special Figure 1 starting port 230, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of game nails, the presence of warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively difficult to enter a falling game ball. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used. In addition, general winning ports (not shown) are provided on the right route and the left route.

  On the front side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and a plurality of movable bodies are arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. Has been. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has six movable bodies: a movable body 1002, a movable body 1004, a movable body 1006, a movable body 1008, a movable body 1010, and a movable body 1012. These movable bodies are arranged in order of the movable body 1010, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1002, the movable bodies 1006 and 1008, and the movable body 1012 from the front side. The movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are arranged so that the positions in the front-rear direction are the same. The movable body 1004 is disposed on the front side of the movable body 1002. The second sub-control unit 500 executes drive control of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1010, and the movable body 1012. The drive control may be executed by the first sub control unit 400.

  The movable body 1002 has a laterally long rectangular external shape when viewed from the front side. The movable body 1002 can move up and down behind the front stage 244. In the state shown in FIG. 40, the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1002 has a sub display device 1030 on the front side.

  A liquid crystal display device is used for the sub display device 1030. The sub display device 1030 has a horizontally long rectangular display area smaller than the decorative symbol display device 208, and produces an effect by displaying one or more images. In this example, the sub display device 1030 displays an image of the seascape where the yacht floats. Although the sub display device 1030 employs a liquid crystal display device, the sub display device 1030 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, but may be configured to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. Further, the display control of the sub display device 1030 is executed by the first sub control unit 400. Note that the display control of the sub display device 1030 may be executed by the second sub control unit 500, or a display control unit for executing the display control may be newly provided. Note that the display control unit may execute display control of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The movable body 1002 includes an elongated illuminating unit 1014a, an illuminating unit 1014b, an illuminating unit 1014c, and an illuminating unit 1014d arranged so as to surround the sub display device 1030. The illumination unit 1014a is disposed on the left side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014b is disposed below the sub display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014c is disposed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014d is disposed above the sub display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of color LEDs are used as the light sources of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and the illumination units 1014a to 1014d can emit light in a plurality of colors.

  A movable body 1004 is disposed on the upper left portion of the movable body 1002. The movable body 1004 has an external shape simulating lightning. The movable body 1004 is fixed at one point in the upper left portion of the movable body 1002 outside the display area of the sub display device 1030. When the movable body 1004 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown), the front of the sub display device 1030 can be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen around the one point. In the state shown in FIG. 40, the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. The movable body 1004 overlaps the display area of the sub display device 1030 in a state where the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. Thereby, a part of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1004. The initial position of the movable body 1004 is a position where the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. The movable body 1004 does not overlap the display area of the sub display device 1030 when positioned at the initial position.

  On the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 1006 is arranged. The movable body 1006 is disposed between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and is movable in the left-right direction. The movable body 1002 has a plate-like shape, and a transmission part 1006a is provided at the upper part and a transmission part 1006b is provided at the lower part. The transmission parts 1006a and 1006b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1006 is visible through the transmission parts 1006a and 1006b. Note that the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b need only be visible on the rear side, and a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be disposed on the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b, and the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b are openings. May be. In addition, an elongated illumination unit 1016 is disposed on the right end of the front surface side of the movable body 1006. The illumination unit 1016 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of colors of LEDs are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1016, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light in a plurality of colors.

  A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1006. The movable body 1006 moves to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. The operation range of the movable body 1006 is from the position where the right end portion of the movable body 1006 is located to the left of the left end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position located in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. . The movable body 1006 becomes invisible to the player in a state where it is located at the left end of the operation range. In the state shown in FIG. 40, the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1006 overlaps a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when it is located at the initial position. Thereby, a part of the image displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible through the transmission parts 1006a and 1006b of the movable body 1006.

  A movable body 1008 is disposed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1008 is disposed between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and is movable in the left-right direction. The movable body 1008 has a plate shape, and is provided with a transmission part 1008a at the upper part and a transmission part 1008b at the lower part. The transmission parts 1008a and 1008b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1008 is visible through the transmission parts 1008a and 1008b. Note that the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b only have to be visible on the rear side, and a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be disposed on the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b. The transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b are openings. May be. In addition, an elongated illuminating unit 1018 is disposed at the left end of the front surface of the movable body 1008. The illumination unit 1018 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of colors of LEDs are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1018, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light in a plurality of colors.

  A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1008. The movable body 1008 moves to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. The operation range of the movable body 1008 is from the position where the left end portion of the movable body 1008 is positioned to the right of the right end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position positioned at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. . The movable body 1008 becomes invisible to the player in a state where it is located at the right end of the operation range. In the state shown in FIG. 40, the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1008 overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 when positioned at the initial position. Thereby, a part of the image displayed on the decorative design display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1008. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible through the transmission parts 1008a and 1008b of the movable body 1008.

  The movable body 1006 functions as a left shutter, and the movable body 1008 functions as a right shutter. When the movable body 1006 moves to the right end of the movement range and the movable body 1008 moves to the left end of the movement range, the right end portion of the movable body 1006 and the left end portion of the movable body 1008 are in contact with each other. The effect that the shutter is opened and closed by the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 is executed.

  A movable body 1010 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1010 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and a character string “chance” is attached to the front side. Further, the movable body 1010 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown), so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen. When the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 are closed, the movable body 1010 can move in front of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 in the vertical direction. In the state shown in FIG. 40, the movable body 1010 is located at the initial position.

  The movable body 1012 is disposed in the upper left part of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The movable body 1012 has an external shape simulating lightning similar to that of the movable body 1004. In addition, the movable body 1012 is fixed outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and at the upper left of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. When the movable body 1012 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown), the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen around the one point. The movable body 1012 can rotate 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. The movable body 1012 may be capable of rotating 360 ° or more.

  In the game board 1000, one sensor for detecting whether the movable bodies 1002 to 1012 are located at the initial position is arranged for each movable body. The sensor is included in the effect movable body sensor 424 shown in FIG. For example, a photo sensor is used as the sensor.

  A main liquid crystal unit 1001 is disposed behind the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. In the state shown in FIG. 40, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. In the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a white circular change icon a1, a white circular hold icon b1, a white circular hold icon b2, and a character “heat” in the white circle A hold icon b3 in which is drawn and a black circular hold icon b4 are displayed in this order from the left. The hold icon b1 indicates the hold of the first special figure 1 variable game with the hold order, the hold icon b2 indicates the hold of the second special figure 1 variable game with the hold order, and the hold icon b3 has the third hold order. The special figure 1 variable game is on hold, and the hold icon b4 indicates the hold of the special figure 1 variable game having the fourth hold order. In the effect display area 208d, a background image including images of the sun, clouds, and balloons is displayed. Part of the sun image is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible to the player through the transmission part 1006 a of the movable body 1006. In addition, a part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible to the player through the transmission part 1006b of the movable body 1006. A part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1002.

  The main liquid crystal unit 1001 includes an elongated illumination unit 1020, an illumination unit 1022, an illumination unit 1024, and an illumination unit 1026 arranged so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 208. The illumination unit 1020 is arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1022 is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1024 is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1026 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. A plurality of colors of LEDs are used as the light sources of the illumination units 1020 to 1026, and the illumination units 1020 to 1026 can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 40, the entire lighting units 1024 and 1026 are visible to the player, and only a part of the lighting unit 1020 is visible from the player via the transmission unit 1006a. Only a part of the upper part is visible to the player through the transmission part 1008a.

  Next, the movable body 1002 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 41A shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the front. Below the movable body 1002, a motor 1040 as a drive source of the movable body 1002 is disposed. The motor 1040 is fixed to the center case of the game board 1000 so that the rotation axis is in the vertical direction. One end of the screw shaft 1042 is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor 1040 so that the extending direction is the vertical direction.

  A lower base 1044 is disposed between the movable body 1002 and the motor 1040. The lower base 1044 is fixed to the game board 1000. The motor 1040 and the lower base 1044 are disposed below the rear side of the front stage 244 and are not visible to the player. The lower base 1044 has a receiving portion 1044a having a flat surface for receiving the movable body 1002 on the right side, and a shaft fixing portion 1044b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. The receiving portion 1044a and the shaft fixing portion 1044b are different from each other, and the receiving portion 1044a is positioned higher than the shaft fixing portion 1044b. For this reason, when the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost part of the movement range, the movable body 1002 contacts the receiving portion 1044a but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1044b.

  Further, the receiving portion 1044a is provided with a through hole that penetrates the lower base 1044 in the vertical direction, and a sliding bearing is disposed in the through hole. The screw shaft 1042 passes through the sliding bearing and is supported by the sliding bearing.

  In the state shown in FIG. 41A, the movable body 1004 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1004 can rotate about 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Note that the movable body 1004 may be rotatable by 60 ° or more (eg, 360 °).

  41B and 41C show a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the rear right side. In the state shown in FIG. 41 (b), the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position in the movement range. In the state shown in FIG. 41 (c), the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost part of the movement range. As shown in FIGS. 41B and 41C, the movable body 1002 includes a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a moving unit 1036. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, is disposed on the front side of the movable body 1002, and includes a movable body 1004, illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and a sub display device 1030 as shown in FIG.

  The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a driver for the sub display device 1030, LEDs of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d, an LED driver, a motor for driving the movable body 1004, and a gear. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a rectangular window portion 1034a, a window portion 1034b, a window portion 1034c, a window portion 1034d (not shown in FIG. 41B), and a window portion 1034e on the rear side. The window portion 1034a is disposed behind the illumination portion 1014a, the window portion 1034b is disposed behind the illumination portion 1014b, the window portion 1034c is disposed behind the illumination portion 1014c, and the window portion 1034d is disposed behind the illumination portion 1014d. Has been. A transparent plate is disposed in the window portions 1034a to 1034e, and the front side of the window portions 1034a to 1034e is visible. On the front side of the windows 1034a to 1034d, an LED, an LED driver mounting board, a decorative lens, and the like are arranged. The windows 1034a to 1034d are used for checking the illumination unit. Further, the window portion 1034e is disposed behind the movable body 1004. A motor for driving the movable body 1004 and a gear for transmitting power to the movable body 1004 are disposed on the front side of the window portion 1034e. The window portion 1034e is used for checking the drive mechanism of the movable body 1004.

  The moving unit 1036 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape smaller than that of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and is arranged on the rear surface side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The moving unit 1036 includes a motor that rotates the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a gear that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor and transmits the power of the motor to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 are connected via a harness. In addition, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is installed in the moving unit 1036 so as to be rotatable about the display area of the sub display device 1030 in the same plane including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 when in the initial posture. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 41B, and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Thus, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 also functions as a movable body.

  When the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable unit 1036 are connected using a connection unit (slip ring or the like) shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 to be described later, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction. May be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 180 degrees, may be rotated up to a predetermined angle exceeding 360 degrees, or there may be no limitation on the rotation angle.

  The moving unit 1036 is provided with two through holes penetrating in the vertical direction. A nut is fixed to the right through hole, and a screw shaft 1042 is fitted to the nut. The movable body 1002 can be moved up and down by moving the nut up and down by the rotation of the screw shaft 1042. A guide shaft 1046 passes through the left through hole. The movable body 1004 is guided by the guide shaft 1046 and can move up and down stably.

  An upper base 1048 is disposed above the moving unit 1036. The upper base 1048 is fixed to a transparent plate (not shown) disposed at a position where the position in the front-rear direction is between the movable body 1002 and the movable bodies 1006 and 1008, and is disposed at a position that is difficult for the player to see. The upper base 1048 has a receiving portion 1048a having a flat surface for receiving the moving unit 1036 on the right side, and a shaft fixing portion 1048b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. A sliding bearing is disposed on the receiving portion 1048b, and the other end of the screw shaft 1042 is supported by the sliding bearing. Further, the receiving portion 1048a and the shaft fixing portion 1048b are stepped, and the receiving portion 1048a is located at a position lower than the shaft fixing portion 1048b. The moving unit 1036 has an upper surface portion 1036a having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1048a when moved to the uppermost position. As shown in FIG. 41 (b), when the movable body 1002 is positioned at the uppermost position, the upper surface portion 1036a of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a, but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

  Further, the moving unit 1036 has a lower surface portion 1036b having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044 when moved to the lowermost position. As shown in FIG. 41 (c), when the movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowest position, the lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a, but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

  The moving unit 1036 includes control means for controlling the moving operation of the movable body 1002 and the rotating operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 inside. Examples of movement control means arranged in the movement unit 1036 include a microprocessor, a programmable IC, an ASIC, a DSP, a ROM, a RAM, an LSI, a communication control circuit, and the like. The movement unit 1036 may include only one of these movement control means or a plurality of movement control means. In addition, a harness (not shown) having one end connected to the sub display device 1030 extends from the rear side of the moving unit 1036, and the other end of the harness is disposed on the back side of the game board 1000 (for example, Connected to the first sub-board 160). The other end of the harness may be connected to the relay board, and the sub display device 1030 and the control board may be connected via the harness and the relay board.

  Next, the operation of the movable body 1002 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41B shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position in the movement range. The upper surface portion 1036 a of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1048 a of the upper base 1048. The receiving portion 1048a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002.

  From the state shown in FIG. 41B, when the motor 1040 is driven to rotate the screw shaft 1042 clockwise when viewed from below, the nut fixed to the moving unit 1036 and fitted to the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. It moves below the shaft 1042. Thereby, the movable body 1002 moves downward.

  FIG. 41C shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the lowest position in the movement range. The lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044. The receiving portion 1044a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002. When the screw shaft 1042 is rotated counterclockwise by the motor 1040 from the state shown in FIG. 41C, the nut fixed to the moving unit 1036 and fitted to the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. Move above the shaft 1042. Thereby, the movable body 1002 moves upward.

  Further, when the movable body 1002 is stationary at a position higher than the lowest position, a load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 due to the weight of the movable body 1002, so that a torque having a magnitude commensurate with the load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 by the motor 1040. . As a result, the screw shaft 1042 can be prevented from rotating due to the load of its own weight, and the movable body 1002 can be stationary.

  Further, when the power source of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off for some reason while the movable body 1002 is stationary at a position higher than the lowermost position, electric power for driving the motor 1040 cannot be obtained. For this reason, the screw shaft 1042 rotates clockwise when viewed from above by the load of the movable body 1002 due to its own weight, and moves until the movable body 1002 contacts the receiving portion 1044b of the lower base 1044. Even when the movable body 1002 moves downward under its own weight, the movable body 1002 can be received by the receiving portion 1044b, so that the movable body 1002 can be prevented from being damaged.

Example 1
42 and 43 show examples of effects in Example 1 of the present embodiment. 42 and 43 show the effect state in time series. 42 (a) to (q), (t), (u), (x) to (z), (b) to (d) and FIG. 43 are diagrams showing the game of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 (b) and 42 (s) show only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and FIGS. 42 (v) and 42 (w) show only the movable body 1002. FIG. In FIG. 42 and subsequent figures, illustrations of the general-purpose display device 210, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and the high accuracy medium lamp 222 are omitted. In addition, illustration of the game ball is also omitted.

  FIG. 42A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42 (a), the number of holdings in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is a position higher than the lowermost position shown in FIG. 41C, and is closer to the lowermost position than the uppermost position shown in FIG. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b.

  42 (b), which continues from FIG. 42 (a), shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Moreover, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon of a pre-reading notice mode as shown in FIG.

  FIG.42 (c) continuing from FIG.42 (b) has shown the state by which the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display apparatus 212 not shown was started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG.42 (d) continuing from FIG.42 (c) has shown the state from which the decoration display of the decoration symbol was started. In FIG. 42 and subsequent figures, the decorative symbol variation display is indicated by a downward white bold arrow. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display is started after the movement animation of the hold / variation icon is started.

  FIG. 42E continuing from FIG. 42D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG.

  FIG.42 (f) continuing from FIG.42 (e) has shown the state which the movable body 1010 moved to the lowest part of the operating range from the initial position. The movable body 1010 is stopped at the front position of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image cannot be visually recognized by the player. The pachinko machine 100 is in a case where at least a part of a decorative pattern or a preview image (for example, an image such as a sun, a cloud, a balloon, a hold icon, a change icon, etc.) overlaps with a movable body and cannot be seen by a player. Compared to the case where at least a part of the decorative symbol or the preview image does not overlap with the movable body, there is a higher possibility that it will be a big hit in the running special figure floating game or the pending special figure floating game It may be configured as follows.

  FIG. 42 (g) continued from FIG. 42 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position in the movement range of the movable body 1010. When the movable body 1010 returns to the initial position, the effect operation of the movable body 1010 in the reach effect ends.

  FIG. 42 (h) continuing from FIG. 42 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved to the right from the initial position. A part of the sun image and a part of “Decoration 2” are visually recognized through the transmissive part 1006a, and a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through the transmissive part 1006b. When the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 42 (g) and when the movable body 1006 is moved rightward from the initial position as shown in FIG. The part where the image of the cloud is visible is different. When a sun image or a cloud image is displayed as a preview image, visible portions of the preview image are different before and after the movable body moves. The pachinko machine 100 is designed to increase the probability of winning a big hit in a running special map variable game or a pending special map variable game when the visible parts of the notice image are different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured.

  FIG. 42 (i) continued from FIG. 42 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved leftward and returned to the initial position. Thereby, the rendering operation of the movable body 1006 in the reach rendering is finished.

  FIG. 42 (j) following FIG. 42 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the initial position. Part of the cloud image and part of the “decoration 2” are visually recognized through the transmissive part 1008a, and part of the cloud image is visually recognized through the transmissive part 1008b. As a result, when the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 42 (i) and when the movable body 1008 is moved leftward from the initial position as shown in FIG. The portions where the image and the cloud image can be visually recognized are different. The pachinko machine 100 is designed to increase the probability of winning a big hit in a running special map variable game or a pending special map variable game when the visible parts of the notice image are different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured.

  FIG. 42 (k) continuing from FIG. 42 (j) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. Thereby, the rendering operation of the movable body 1008 in the reach rendering is finished.

  FIG. 42 (l) following FIG. 42 (k) shows a state where the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position from the initial position. In this example, the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position, and starts the effect operation.

  FIG. 42 (m) continuing from FIG. 42 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 starts rotating. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can be rotated 180 ° clockwise and counterclockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 42 (l) where the upper and lower ends are parallel to the horizontal direction and the left and right ends are parallel to the vertical direction. It is. In FIG. 42 (m), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 42 (n) following FIG. 42 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 42L to 42N, before and after the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, portions where the balloon image and the cloud image are visible are different. When a balloon image or a cloud image is displayed as a preview image, the visible portion of the preview image is different before and after the operation of the movable body. The pachinko machine 100 is designed to increase the probability of winning a big hit in a running special map variable game or a pending special map variable game when the visible parts of the notice image are different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured.

  FIG. 42 (o) following FIG. 42 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 42 (n) and returned to the initial posture.

  FIG. 42 (p) following FIG. 42 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved downward and returned to the initial position. Thereby, the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 in the reach rendering ends.

  FIG. 42 (q) continued from FIG. 42 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 42 (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted at the same timing as FIG. 42 (q), and shows a state in which the movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Due to the rotation of the movable body 1012, the movable body 1012 and the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap. For this reason, the movable body 1012 makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize the sun image and part of the “decoration 2”. The pachinko machine 100 is in a special figure variable game that is being executed or a special figure variable game that is pending if at least a part of a notice image such as a sun image becomes invisible to the player after the movable body is operated. You may be comprised so that the probability of winning a jackpot may become high.

  42 (s) subsequent to FIGS. 42 (q) and (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted, and the movable body 1012 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 42 (q) and (r). It shows a state where it has rotated 90 ° and returned to its initial position. FIG. 42 (t) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 42 (s). When the movable body 1012 returns to the initial position, the effect operation of the movable body 1012 in the reach effect ends.

  FIG. 42 (u) continuing from FIGS. 42 (s) and (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 42 (v) shows only the movable body 1002 extracted at the same timing as that in FIG. 42 (u), and shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Due to the rotation of the movable body 1004, the movable body 1004 and the image of the seascape displayed on the sub display device 1030 overlap. For this reason, the movable body 1004 makes it impossible for the player to see part of the image of the seascape. An image of the sea view may be displayed as a preview image. The pachinko machine 100 is in a special figure variable game that is being executed or a special figure variable game that is pending if at least a part of a preview image such as an image of the sea is not visible to the player after the movable body is operated. You may be comprised so that the probability of winning a jackpot may become high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (u), the number of holdings in FIG. A white circular hold icon is displayed.

  42 (w) subsequent to FIGS. 42 (u) and (v) shows only the movable body 1002 extracted, and the movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 42 (u) and (v). This shows the state where it has rotated and returned to its initial position. FIG. 42 (x) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 42 (w). When the movable body 1004 returns to the initial position, the rendering operation of the movable body 1004 in the reach production ends.

  FIG. 42 (y) subsequent to FIGS. 42 (w) and (x) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 42 (z) subsequent to FIG. 42 (y) shows a state in which the animation for deleting the variation icon is executed during the non-execution of the special figure variation game. In the effect display area 208d, the black circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is deleted.

  FIG. 42 (a) following FIG. 42 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, a movement animation between the hold and change icons is displayed in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left.

  42 (b) following FIG. 42 (b), the decorative symbol variation display is started based on the fact that the first sub-control unit 400 has received the symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300. Indicates the state. The symbol variation start command includes variation time information. The variation time of this example is determined to be, for example, 30 seconds in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 42 (c) following FIG. 42 (b) shows a state in which power interruption occurs when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off. Further, in this example, all the movable bodies other than the movable body 1002 are stopped at the position where the power interruption occurs.

  FIG. 42 (d) continuing from FIG. 42 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position. As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowest position in the moving range by its own weight. The movable body 1002 is located at the lowest position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a non-operating state with the power off. The lowermost position of the movable body 1002 is a non-operating position of the movable body 1002. When the movable body 1002 is located at the non-operating position, only the upper end portion of the display area of the sub display device 1030 is visible from the player.

  FIG. 43A continued from FIG. 42D shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

  FIG. 43B continued from FIG. 43A shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. The pachinko machine 100 is activated in the order of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 when the power is turned on from off. In FIG. 43 (b), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is resumed, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image “Active”.

  FIG. 43C continuing from FIG. 43B shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 43 (d) continuing from FIG. 43 (c) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body has been started. In this example, first, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is executed. As shown in FIG. 43 (d), the movable body 1002 has moved to the uppermost position. In addition, the sub display device 1030 provided in the movable body 1002 displays a character string image of “in initial operation” as in the case of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 43E continuing from FIG. 43D shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 43 (f) following FIG. 43 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has been rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 43 (e). 43 (g) following FIG. 43 (f), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 43 (f) to return to the initial position, and then the movable body 1002 returns to the initial position. The moved state is shown. In the initial operation of the movable body 1002 of this example, first, the movable body 1002 moves from the lowermost position to the uppermost position, and then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and then The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 90 ° clockwise, then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and finally the movable body 1002 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed. The initial position of movable body 1002 is the start position of the rendering operation of movable body 1002.

  FIG. 43 (h) continued from FIG. 43 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started an initial operation. The movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position in the movement range. FIG. 43 (i) continued from FIG. 43 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1010 moves upward and returns to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, the movable body 1010 first moves from the initial position (uppermost position) to the lowermost position, and then the movable body 1010 returns from the lowermost position to the initial position. . When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

  FIG. 43 (j) continued from FIG. 43 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started an initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the movement range. FIG. 43 (k) subsequent to FIG. 43 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, first, the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 returns from the rightmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

  FIG. 43 (l) subsequent to FIG. 43 (k) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started an initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. FIG. 43 (m) subsequent to FIG. 43 (l) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 moves to the right and returns to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1008 of this example, first, the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the leftmost position, and then the movable body 1008 returns from the leftmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1008 is completed.

  FIG. 43 (n) subsequent to FIG. 43 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 starts an initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 43 (o) following FIG. 43 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 returns to the initial position by rotating 60 ° counterclockwise. In the initial operation of the movable body 1012 in this example, first, the movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1012 is completed.

  FIG. 43 (p) subsequent to FIG. 43 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has started an initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 43 (q) subsequent to FIG. 43 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated counterclockwise by 60 ° and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. In this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operations of all the movable bodies are completed.

  In this example, the initial operation of the movable body is executed in the order of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1010, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1012, and the movable body 1004. The execution order of the initial operation of the movable body can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 43 (r) subsequent to FIG. 43 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed on the special figure 1 display device 212. FIG. If a power interruption occurs during the execution of the special figure variable game, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the decoration until the symbol variation stop command is received from the main control unit 300 after the initial operation of the movable body is completed. Control is performed so that the symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 become the preparation screen. As a result, the character string image “in preparation” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. In addition, although one game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (r), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a hold icon indicating an increased hold because of the preparation screen. Not done. It should be noted that the leftmost LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is lit and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is one.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable game being executed is stored in the RAM 308 by the power interruption process (step S243) executed at the time of power interruption, the stop symbol, the variable time, and the special figure 1. A display symbol update timer or the like is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data. The main control unit 300 returns to the gaming state before the power interruption based on the return data by the power recovery process after power-on (step S111). As a result, the main control unit 300 executes control to end the special figure 1 variable game when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game executed at the time of the power interruption has elapsed for 30 seconds.

  FIG. 43 (s) continuing from FIG. 43 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 1 variable game in this example is out of place. Based on the fact that the first sub-control unit 400 has received the symbol variation stop command including information indicating that the result of the determination is wrong from the main control unit 300, the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 is displayed. To resume. In the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is an outlier combination, is stopped and displayed, and in the effect display area 208d, images of the sun and clouds are displayed. The background image including the image of the balloon and the image of the balloon is displayed. In addition, since the hold in FIG. 1 is 1, one white circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In addition, the variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game executed before the power interruption is not displayed in the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the power recovery. The sub display device 1030 displays an image of the seascape.

  FIG. 43 (t) subsequent to FIG. 43 (s) shows a state in which one hold in FIG. 1 is consumed and a special FIG. 1 variable game is started. After the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon, a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed, and then the decorative symbol change display is started. In addition, the movable body 1002 stands by at the initial position until the second sub control unit 500 receives the rendering operation start command. Moreover, the movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost position. When the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the right end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes visible. For this reason, when the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the preview image that overlaps the movable body 1008 may be visible when the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. When the notice image becomes visible, the pachinko machine 100 wins big hits in the running special figure variable game or the pending special figure variable game, compared to the case where the notice image remains invisible. You may be comprised so that the probability of winning may become high.

  FIG. 43 (u) continued from FIG. 43 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the rendering operation. The second sub control unit 500 starts driving control of the movable body 1002 based on the reception of the command including the start command for the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub control unit 400. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  FIG. 43 (v) continuing from FIG. 43 (u) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1002 stands by at the initial position until the second sub-control unit 500 receives the rendering operation start command. Further, based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of special figures in FIG. 1 increases from 0 to 1, and a black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. .

  FIG. 43 (w) continuing from FIG. 43 (v) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place. Moreover, the movable body 1008 has returned to the initial position. In addition, during the stop display of the decorative design, a variation icon erasing animation is executed to erase the white circular variation icon.

  FIG. 43 (x), which continues from FIG. 43 (w), shows a state in which one hold in FIG. 1 has been consumed and a special FIG. 1 variable game has started. After the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon, a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed, and then the decorative symbol change display is started. In addition, the movable body 1002 waits to receive a start instruction for the rendering operation at the initial position.

  FIG. 43 (y) subsequent to FIG. 43 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the rendering operation. The second sub control unit 500 starts driving control of the movable body 1002 based on the reception of the command including the start command for the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub control unit 400. In this example, after the movable body 1002 moves from the initial position to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 43 (z) subsequent to FIG. 43 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. After the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, the movable body 1002 moves downward to return to the initial position. Note that the movable body 1002 may move downward during the execution of the rotation operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture.

  FIG. 43 (a) continuing from FIG. 43 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 43 (B) following FIG. 43 (A) shows a state in which the animation for deleting the variable icon is executed during the stop display of the decorative symbol. As a result, the black circular variation icon is deleted.

In the present embodiment, the movable body 1002 starts the rendering operation from the initial position and ends the rendering operation at the initial position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation from a position other than the initial position and the lowest position. The movable body 1002 may start the rendering operation from the lowest position. The movable body 1002 may end the effect operation at the lowest position. The movable body 1002 may end the rendering operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowest position. The movable body 1002 may start the rendering operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position, and end the rendering operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The start position of the rendering operation of the movable body 1002 and the end position of the rendering operation may be the same or different.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Further, when the power source is turned off in a state where the movable body 1002 is at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position (for example, the fourth position), the movable body 1002 is positioned at the lowermost position from the fourth position. It may be configured to move to.

  Further, when the power source is turned off in a state where the movable body 1002 is at a third position other than the fourth position, the initial position, and the lowest position, the movable body 1002 is moved from the third position. It is configured to move to the lowest position.

  Further, a fourth control unit (for example, the second sub-control unit 500) that controls the movable body 1002 and a drive unit that drives the movable body 1002 are provided.

  In addition, a sensor is provided for detecting whether or not the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, and when the sensor detects that the movable body 1002 is not located at the initial position when the power is turned off. The movable body 1002 is configured to move to the lowest position. A sensor is provided for detecting whether or not the movable body is in the initial posture. When the sensor detects that the movable body is not in the initial posture when the power is turned off, the movable body is placed in the initial posture. You may be comprised so that it may return to. Note that the drive control of the movable body 1002 in this embodiment may be applied to another movable body.

(Example 2)
FIG. 44 shows an effect example in Example 2 of the present embodiment. FIG. 44 shows the effect state in time series. Each drawing of FIG. 44 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 44A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special-figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Also, in the state shown in FIG. 44 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 44A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  44 (b) continued from FIG. 44 (a), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and increased. This shows a state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the effect display region 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

  FIG. 44C continuing from FIG. 44B shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started to perform the rendering operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. The movement start timing of the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 may be the same, or one of them may be the first. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is set so that the greater the number of movable bodies that move in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the same timing, the higher the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed. May be.

  FIG. 44D subsequent to FIG. 44C shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 perform the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 performs the rendering operation. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 44C, and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. The initial posture of the movable body 1010 is a posture in which the upper and lower ends of the movable body 1010 are parallel to the horizontal direction. In addition, a drive mechanism that rotates the movable body 1010 can be the same as the drive mechanism that rotates the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In the state shown in FIG. 44D, the movable body 1010 rotates 30 ° clockwise, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 30 ° clockwise, and the movable body 1006 moves rightward from the initial position. The operation start timings of the movable body 1010, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1006 may be the same, the operation start timings of the two movable bodies may be the same, or the operations start of the three movable bodies. The timing may be different. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is set such that the greater the number of movable bodies that rotate in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the same timing, the higher the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variable game being executed. It may be.

  FIG. 44 (e) continued from FIG. 44 (d) shows a state where the power interruption of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 44 (f) continued from FIG. 44 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture while the pachinko machine 100 is powered off. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a power storage control unit 660 that includes a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position or the initial posture even after the power from the outside is cut off. In preparation. When the power interruption occurs, the second sub control unit 500 drives the movable body with the power supplied from the power storage circuit to return to the initial position or the initial posture. In this embodiment, when power interruption occurs, control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, and control for returning the movable body 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable body 1006 remains stationary at the position when the power interruption occurs. Note that when the movable body 1006 is capable of rotating, and power interruption occurs after the movable body 1006 performs the rotational operation, the movable body 1006 remains stationary while rotating from the initial posture.

  FIG. 44 (g) continued from FIG. 44 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowest position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. For this reason, in the power-off state of the pachinko machine 100, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowest position below the initial position. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, and executes the drive control to move the movable body 1002 to the lowest position. Good.

  FIG. 44 (h) following FIG. 44 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 44 (i) continued from FIG. 44 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

  44 (j) following FIG. 44 (i) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state waiting for power-on.

  44 (k) subsequent to FIG. 44 (j) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 44 (k), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is resumed, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub control unit 400 is activated. The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image “Starting.”. In addition, the character image “start” of the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

  FIG. 44 (l) following FIG. 44 (k) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 44 (m) following FIG. 44 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body has been started. In this example, first, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is executed. As shown in FIG. 44 (m), the movable body 1002 has moved from the lowermost position to the uppermost position. In addition, the sub display device 1030 provided in the movable body 1002 displays a character string image of “in initial operation” as in the case of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 44 (n) following FIG. 44 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. 44 (o) following FIG. 44 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 44 (n). 44 (p) following FIG. 44 (o), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 44 (o) to return to the initial position, and then the movable body 1002 is brought to the initial position. The moved state is shown. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed.

  FIG. 44 (q) continued from FIG. 44 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started the initial operation. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowest position. FIG. 44 (r) continuing from FIG. 44 (q) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture. 44 (s) subsequent to FIG. 44 (r) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 44 (r) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 44 (t) following FIG. 44 (s) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowest position, then the movable body 1010 rotates 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture, and then the movable body 1010. Rotates 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and finally, the movable body 1010 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

  FIG. 44 (u) following FIG. 44 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started an initial operation. If the movable body 1006 is stopped at a position other than the initial position at the start of the initial operation, the movable body 1006 first returns to the initial position. FIG. 44 (v) following FIG. 44 (u) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end in the movement range. 44 (w) following FIG. 44 (v) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, first, the movable body 1006 returns to the initial position, then the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 moves to the rightmost position. To return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

  44 (x) subsequent to FIG. 44 (w) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. FIG. 44 (y) subsequent to FIG. 44 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 moves to the right and returns to the initial position.

  44 (z) subsequent to FIG. 44 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. 44 (a) following FIG. 44 (z) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 returns to the initial position by rotating 60 ° counterclockwise.

  In FIG. 44 (a), the movable body 1004 starts an initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. 44 (B) following FIG. 44 (A) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position. FIG. 44 (c) continued from FIG. 44 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise. FIG. 44 (2) following FIG. 44 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position, The movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. As described above, the same operation may be executed a plurality of times in the initial operation of the movable body. In this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operations of all the movable bodies are completed.

(Example 3)
FIG. 45 shows an effect example in Example 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 44 shows the effect state in time series. 45 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 45A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special-figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 45 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 45A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  45 (b), which continues from FIG. 45 (a), is based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1, and has increased. This shows a state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the effect display region 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

  FIG. 45C continuing from FIG. 45B shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started to perform the rendering operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position.

  FIG. 45 (d) continuing from FIG. 45 (c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the movable body 1004, and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 perform the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 performs the rendering operation. Yes. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 45C, and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In the state shown in FIG. 45D, the movable body 1010 rotates 30 ° clockwise, the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° clockwise, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 30 ° clockwise, and the movable body 1006 Is moving to the right from the initial position. The operation start timings of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1004 may be the same or different.

  FIG. 45 (e) following FIG. 45 (d) shows a state in which a power interruption occurs during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 45 (f) continuing from FIG. 45 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture while the pachinko machine 100 is powered off. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a power storage control unit 660 that includes a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position or the initial posture even after the power from the outside is cut off. In preparation. When the power interruption occurs, the second sub control unit 500 drives the movable body with the power supplied from the power storage circuit to return to the initial position or the initial posture. In this embodiment, when power interruption occurs, control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, and control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable bodies 1004 and 1006 remain stationary at the position when the power interruption occurs. Note that when the movable body 1006 is capable of rotating, and power interruption occurs after the movable body 1006 performs the rotational operation, the movable body 1006 remains stationary while rotating from the initial posture. Further, control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial positions may be executed.

  FIG. 45G continued from FIG. 45F shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowest position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. For this reason, in the power-off state of the pachinko machine 100, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowest position below the initial position. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, and executes the drive control to move the movable body 1002 to the lowest position. Good.

  FIG. 45 (h) following FIG. 45 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 45 (i) following FIG. 45 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 45 (j) continuing from FIG. 45 (i) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state waiting for power-on.

  FIG. 45 (k) subsequent to FIG. 45 (j) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 45 (k), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is resumed, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub control unit 400 is activated. The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image “Starting.”. In addition, the character image “start” of the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

  FIG. 45 (l) following FIG. 45 (k) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 45 (m) subsequent to FIG. 45 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body has been started. In this example, when there is a movable body that is stopped at a position different from the initial position at the start of the initial operation of the movable body, control for returning the movable body to the initial position is executed. In FIG. 45 (m), first, the movable body 1006 has returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 45 (n) subsequent to FIG. 45 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 45 (o) following FIG. 45 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial value from the lowest position. FIG. 45 (p) following FIG. 45 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the initial operation and moved to the uppermost position. The movable body 1002 starts an initial operation after returning to the initial position.

Example 4
FIG. 46 shows an effect example in Example 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 46 shows the effect state in time series. Each of FIGS. 46A to 46N shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 46A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the latest special-figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 46A, the number of holds in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 46A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  46 (b) continued from FIG. 46 (a), the number of holdings in FIG. 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and increased. This shows a state where the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the effect display region 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

  FIG. 46C continuing from FIG. 46B shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started to execute the rendering operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

  FIG. 46D subsequent to FIG. 46C shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 performs the rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 46 (e) continued from FIG. 46 (d) shows a state where the power interruption of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 46 (f) continued from FIG. 46 (e) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved to its lowest position by its own weight without returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to the initial posture. In this example, the control for returning the movable body to the initial posture or the initial position at the time of power interruption is not executed.

  46 (g) subsequent to FIG. 46 (g) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state waiting for power-on.

  46 (h) following FIG. 46 (g) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 46 (h), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is resumed, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub control unit 400 is activated. The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image “active”. The sub display device 1030 displays a character string image “active”.

  46 (i) subsequent to FIG. 46 (h) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

  FIG. 46 (j) following FIG. 46 (i) shows a state where the initial operation of the movable body 1002 has started. After the movable body 1002 moves to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates clockwise. In the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 performs an operation of rotating 180 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. In this example, since the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is stationary while rotating 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture at the start of the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360 ° clockwise after the start of the initial operation.

  46 (k) continuing from FIG. 46 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture and is stationary. 46 (l) subsequent to FIG. 46 (k) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotating counterclockwise. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 46K, and then rotates 180 ° clockwise to return to the initial posture. 46 (m) subsequent to FIG. 46 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture. 46 (n) following FIG. 46 (m) shows a state where the movable body 1002 has moved to the initial position. The movable body 1002 ends the initial operation when it moves to the initial position.

  FIG. 46 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 in the state shown in FIGS. 46 (f) to 46 (i) is viewed from the rear right side. In this example, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost position while the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. As shown in FIG. 46 (o), a lower escape portion 1050 having a space for allowing the movable body 1002 to escape is provided below the front side of the lower base 1044. The lower escape portion 1050 is provided in the center case of the game board 1000 at the lower rear side of the front stage 244 of the game board 1000. A receiving portion 1052 having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is disposed at the lowermost end of the lower relief portion 1050. A buffer portion 1054 is provided on the upper surface of the receiving portion 1052. A sheet-like buffer member is used for the buffer unit 1054.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off with the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotated by 45 ° or more from the initial posture, for example, the moving unit 1036 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 cannot be received by the lower base 1044, but the lower escape portion 1050 It can be received by the receiving unit 1052. Thereby, even if the movable body 1002 having a posture different from the initial posture moves to the lower limit position, the movable body 1002 can be prevented from colliding with the peripheral device or the peripheral member.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the movable body 1002 can move upward from the initial position of the movable body 1010, an upper clearance portion may be provided. Similar to the lower escape portion 1050, the upper escape portion is provided to prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with a peripheral device or a peripheral member. The upper relief portion only needs to be provided with a receiving portion having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a buffer portion on the lower surface of the receiving portion.

(Example 5)
FIG. 47 shows an effect example in Example 5 of the present embodiment. FIG. 47 shows the effect state in time series. 47 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 47A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 47 (a), the number of holdings in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 47A, the movable bodies 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

  FIG. 47 (b) continued from FIG. 47 (a) shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1.

  FIG. 47 (c) continued from FIG. 47 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (d) continued from FIG. 47 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  47 (e) following FIG. 47 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 47 (e).

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate. The drive mechanism that executes the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is the same as the drive mechanism that executes the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the above embodiment. Thus, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 also functions as a movable body. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 45 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise around the center of the display area from the initial posture in which the upper and lower sides of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are parallel to the horizontal direction. Is possible. When the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may not be able to rotate, or both units may be able to rotate. In this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot rotate. Further, when the main liquid crystal unit 1001 cannot be rotated as in the above embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be rotatable or may not be rotated.

  FIG. 47 (f) continued from FIG. 47 (e) shows a state in which an effect in the previous stage of the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is started. In this example, before the main liquid crystal unit 1001 starts the rotation operation, the change icon, the hold icon, and the decorative design are displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then these displays are erased from the decorative design display device 208. . In this example, first, a black circular variation icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then the variation icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. If a hold icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then the hold icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the variation icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is the same as the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 47 (g) continued from FIG. 47 (f) shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed on the sub display device 1030. After the sub display device 1030 temporarily stops and displays “decoration 2” as the left and right symbols, and the middle symbol is variably displayed, the decoration symbol display is deleted from the ornament symbol display device 208.

  When the display of the variation icon, the hold icon, the decoration symbol, and the like is deleted on the decorative symbol display device 208, another display that overlaps the display may be visible to the player. The other display may be displayed as a preview image. When the other display becomes visible to the player, the pachinko machine 100 is executing the special figure variable game being held or being held more than when the other display remains invisible to the player. You may be comprised so that the probability of winning a jackpot in a special figure variable game may become high.

  FIG. 47 (h) following FIG. 47 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has started the rendering operation. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture.

  47 (i) following FIG. 47 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 47 (h). Further, based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of special figures in FIG. 1 increases from 0 to 1, and a white circular hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030. .

  FIG. 47 (j) following FIG. 47 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 47 (i) and returned to the initial posture. In addition, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed as a middle symbol on the sub display device 1030, and the first sub control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command transmitted from the main control unit 300. On the device 1030, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed symbol.

  FIG. 47 (k) subsequent to FIG. 47 (j) shows a state in which the deletion icon deletion animation is executed. In the sub display device 1030, the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed, and the black circular fluctuation icon is deleted.

  FIG. 47 (l) following FIG. 47 (k) shows a non-execution state of the special figure variable game. The special figure 1 of the off symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), and “decoration 2 -decoration 3 -decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  47 (m) following FIG. 47 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). As shown in FIG. 1, after the start of the variable game, the sub-display device 1030 displays a moving animation between the hold icon and the change icon that moves to the left. In addition, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movable body 1006 has moved to the leftmost end. For this reason, the movable body 1006 cannot be visually recognized by the player.

  47 (n) subsequent to FIG. 47 (m) shows a state in which the decorative display variable display is started on the sub display device 1030. FIG.

  FIG. 47 (o) following FIG. 47 (n) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is resumed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed during execution of the special symbol variable game after the special graphic variable game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has executed the rotation effect operation. After the decorative symbol variation display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub-display device 1030 erases the decorative symbol variation display.

  47 (n) subsequent to FIG. 47 (o) shows a state in which the display of the variation icon is resumed in the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In this example, the display of the variation icon and the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed during execution of the special figure variable game following the special figure variable game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has executed the rotation effect operation. After the display of the variation icon is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation icon is deleted on the sub display device 1030. When the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the hold icon is deleted on the sub display device 1030 after the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is started.

  FIG. 47 (q) continued from FIG. 47 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place. Note that the movable body 1006 may return to the initial position after the end of the special figure 1 variable game.

  FIG. 47 (r) subsequent to FIG. 47 (q) shows a state in which the variation icon erasing animation is executed during the non-execution of the special figure variation game. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is deleted.

(Example 6)
FIG. 48 shows an effect example in Example 6 of the present embodiment. FIG. 48 shows the effect state in time series. 48 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 47A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 48 (a), the number of holdings in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. Further, in this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot be moved and rotated, and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is moved in the vertical direction by a driving mechanism similar to the movable body 1002 shown in FIG. It is possible. Further, as in the fifth embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate. In the state shown in FIG. 48A, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is in the initial position in the initial posture. Note that both the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be movable up and down.

  FIG. 48 (b) continuing from FIG. 48 (a) shows a state in which a power interruption occurs during the non-execution of the special figure variable game and the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off. The display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

  FIG. 48C continuing from FIG. 48B shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position. Similar to the movable body 1002, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves to the lowest position in the moving range by its own weight. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the lowest position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a non-operating state with the power off. In addition, the second sub control unit 500 may execute drive control for moving the main liquid crystal unit 1001 to the lowest position with the power supplied from the power storage circuit provided in the power control unit 660.

  FIG. 48 (d) continuing from FIG. 48 (c) shows a state where the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

  FIG. 48E continuing from FIG. 48D shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 48 (e), the first sub-control unit 400 is being activated, and a character string image of “being activated” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. Has been.

  FIG. 48 (f) continuing from FIG. 48 (e) shows a state in which the second sub control unit 500 is activated. After the second sub-control unit 500 is activated, an initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string image of “Initial operation” to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed. Note that the character string image “Active” is continuously displayed on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 48 (g) continued from FIG. 48 (f) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, only the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is executed. As shown in FIG. 48G, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves upward and is positioned at the initial position.

  FIG. 48 (h) following FIG. 48 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 48 (i) continuing from FIG. 48 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 48 (h). FIG. 48 (j) following FIG. 48 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 48 (i) and returned to the initial posture. In the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 of this example, first, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves from the lowest position (non-operating operation position) to the initial position, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates counterclockwise from the initial posture. Then, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 90 ° clockwise, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is completed.

  FIG. 48 (k) continuing from FIG. 48 (j) shows a state where the initial operation of the movable body is completed and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is resumed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed. The stop symbol “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is a default stop symbol. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 48 (k), the number of holds in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero.

(Example 7)
FIG. 49 shows an effect example in Example 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 49 shows the effect state in time series. 49 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 49A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 49A, the number of holds in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. Further, in this embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can execute vertical movement and rotation, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can execute vertical movement and rotation. In the state shown in FIG. 49A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012 are positioned at the initial position, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is positioned at the initial position in the initial posture, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is initially positioned. Still in posture.

  FIG. 49 (b) continued from FIG. 49 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1.

  FIG. 49 (c) continuing from FIG. 49 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (d) following FIG. 49 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 49 (e) following FIG. 49 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 49 (e).

  FIG. 49 (f) continued from FIG. 49 (e) shows a state in which the rendering operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is started. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 49 (g) subsequent to FIG. 49 (f) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 49 (g).

  FIG. 49 (h) continued from FIG. 49 (g) shows a state in which the effect operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is started. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture.

  FIG. 49 (i) following FIG. 49 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 49 (h). The rotation start timing of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be the same, or one of them may be the first. In the rotation operation, the rotation speeds of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are the same.

  FIG. 49 (j) following FIG. 49 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 49 (h). In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a rotation speed larger than that of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. At the time shown in FIG. 49 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 49 (i). The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 49 (i).

  In FIG. 49 (k) following FIG. 49 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 49 (j), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is in the state shown in FIG. 49 (j). It shows the state rotated 30 ° clockwise. In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a higher rotation speed than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  In FIG. 49 (l) following FIG. 49 (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 49 (k), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 starts from the state shown in FIG. 49 (k). A state rotated 30 ° counterclockwise is shown. As a result, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 return to the initial posture.

  FIG. 49 (m) subsequent to FIG. 49 (l) shows a state in which an effect operation is performed in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move in the vertical direction. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves downward, and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves upward. Thus, in the effect operation of this example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move in opposite directions.

  FIG. 49 (n) subsequent to FIG. 49 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Prior to the end of the special figure 1 variable game, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 are returned to the initial positions. Moreover, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 49 (o) subsequent to FIG. 49 (n) shows a state in which the fluctuation icon deletion animation is executed while the special figure fluctuation game is not executed. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is deleted.

(Example 8)
Next, a connection unit 1060 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A slip ring is used for the connection unit 1060 of this embodiment.

  50A to 50D are external perspective views of the connection unit 1060 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. First, the external configuration of the connection unit 1060 will be described with reference to FIG. The connection unit 1060 includes an upper case 1062 and a lower case 1064. The upper case 1062 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. Further, the upper case 1062 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 50A to 50D, the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

  A lower case 1064 is disposed below the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1064 is opened. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1062 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1064 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1062 have the same size, and the lower case 1064 is disposed so that the upper surface matches the lower surface of the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 is shorter in the vertical direction than the upper case 1062 when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 50A to 50E, the lower case 1064 is hatched to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations. Further, the upper case 1062 and the lower case 1064 are disposed on the moving unit 1036 side.

  A fixed-side connector 1066 is provided at the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1062. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the fixed connector 1066 is connected to the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected via a relay board.

  A circular opening 1068 is provided at the center of the upper surface of the upper case 1062. A circular rotation side case 1070 is disposed in the opening 1068. The rotation side case 1070 is disposed on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. A rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided at the center of the rotation side case 1070. The rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 has one end fixed to the rotation shaft of a motor disposed in the moving unit 1036 and the other end fixed to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the rotation side case 1070. It arrange | positions so that it may extend | stretch. The rotation side case 1070 is provided with a rotation side connector 1074. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the rotation side connector 1074 is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  The rotation side case 1070 rotates with the shaft. 50 (b) to 50 (d) show a state in which the rotation side case 1070 has been rotated. FIG. 50B shows a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 50A when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 50C shows a state in which the rotating side case 1070 is rotated 180 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 50A when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 50D shows a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 270 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 50A when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above.

  FIG. 50E shows a state where the inside of the lower case 1064 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the upper case 1062 side. A circular rotation shaft hole 1076 is provided at the center of the lower case 1064. A shaft for rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 passes through the rotation shaft hole 1076.

  The fixed connector 1066 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1064 is provided with conductive portions 1078, 1080, 1082, 1084, 1086, 1088 connected to the pins of the fixed connector 1066, respectively. Yes. Taking the conductive portion 1078 as an example, the conductive portion 1078 has an elongated conductive plate 1078a and a fixture 1078b for fixing one end of the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064. The fixture 1078b fixes the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064 so that the conductive plate 1078b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1078b. The conductive portions 1080 to 1088 have the same configuration as the conductive portion 1078.

  FIG. 50F shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1070 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the lower case 1064 side. A rotation side substrate 1090 is disposed on the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1070. The rotation side substrate 1090 is a slip ring. The rotation-side substrate 1090 has a circular shape and has a circumferential insulating portion 1092. In addition, circumferential wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1092 of the rotation side substrate 1090. The wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. The insulating portion 1092 and the wirings 1094 to 1104 are concentrically arranged, and a rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided at the center of the concentric circle. In FIG. 50F, the insulating portion 1092 and the wiring portions 1094 to 1104 are hatched to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

  The rotation side connector 1074 of the rotation side case 1070 is provided with 6 pins, and each pin is connected to the wirings 1094 to 1104. The wiring 1094 is connected to the conductive portion 1078 shown in FIG. 50E, the wiring 1096 is connected to the conductive portion 1080 shown in FIG. 50E, and the wiring 1098 is connected to the conductive portion 1082 shown in FIG. The wiring 1100 is connected to the conductive portion 1084 shown in FIG. 50E, the wiring 1102 is connected to the conductive portion 1086 shown in FIG. 50E, and the wiring 1104 is connected to the conductive portion 1088 shown in FIG. Connected.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50G and 50H, the connection state between each conductive portion and each wiring will be described taking the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 as an example. 50 (g) and 50 (h) show the conductive portion 1078 extracted along the line AA in FIG. 50 (e). The conductive plate 1078a has a shape extending obliquely upward from the lower case 1064. When the lower case 1064 is placed on the upper case 1062 with the upper surface of the lower case 1064 and the lower surface of the upper case 1062 aligned, as shown in FIG. 50 (h), the wiring 1094 has the other end of the conductive plate 1078a downward. It contacts the conductive plate 1078a so as to be pushed in. In this way, the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are connected. The connection state between the conductive portions 1080 to 1088 and the wirings 1096 to 1104 is the same.

  The conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are used for supplying power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1080 and the wiring 1096 are used for supplying power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1082 and the wiring 1098 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub board 160. The conductive portion 1084 and the wiring 1100 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1086 and the wiring 1102 are used for transmitting various signals from the first sub-substrate 160 to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1088 and the wiring 1104 are used for transmitting various signals from the first sub-board 160 to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

As an example of various signals, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), the first sub-control unit 400 applies to the microcomputer. Examples include a production command (a command for designating production, progression of production, still image, moving image, progression of image display scenario, and the like).
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be provided with image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, the image control provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 from the microcomputer. Image commands (commands that specify the progress of a still image, a moving image, an image display scenario, etc.) for the means.
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or image control means for controlling image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but is mounted on the first sub board 160 or the moving unit 1036, and the sub liquid crystal unit. The image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means or the like) may be mounted on 1032. In this case, the image drive control means (from the image control means provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036) Image data (for example, image data transmitted for a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.).

Example 9
Next, a connection unit of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, a connection unit 1110 is used as the connection unit.

  FIG. 51A is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 is disposed in the moving unit 1036 shown in FIG. 41 and is electrically connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  First, the external configuration of the connection unit 1110 will be described with reference to FIG. The connection unit 1110 includes an upper case 1112 and a lower case 1114. The upper case 1112 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. Further, the upper case 1112 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 51A and 51C, the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

  A lower case 1114 is disposed below the upper case 1112. The lower case 1114 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1114 is opened. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1112 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1114 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1112 have the same size, and the lower case 1114 is arranged such that the upper surface coincides with the lower surface of the upper case 1112. Further, the lower case 1114 is shorter in the vertical direction than the upper case 1112 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 51A and 51B, the lower case 1114 is hatched to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations. Further, the upper case 1112 and the lower case 1114 are disposed on the moving unit 1036 side.

  A fixed-side connector 1116 is provided at the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1112. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the fixed connector 1116 is connected to the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400. Note that the harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected via a relay board.

  A circular opening 1118 is provided at the center of the upper bottom surface of the upper case 1112. A circular rotation side case 1120 is disposed in the opening 1118. The rotation side case 1120 is disposed on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The rotation side case 1120 is provided with a rotation side connector 1022. In the present embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the rotation side connector 1122 is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

  Fixed to the upper surface of the rotation-side case 1112 are columnar rotor connecting shafts 1124, 1126, and 1128 that extend perpendicularly to the upper surface and extend upward. The rotating body connecting shafts 1124, 1126, and 1128 have the same length. Further, the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 are arranged at equal intervals on the rotating side case 1112. Bearings are attached to the tips of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is attached to the bearings. Further, when the tips of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 are connected, an equilateral triangle is formed, and data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 described later are arranged at the center of gravity of the equilateral triangle.

  FIG. 51B shows a state in which the inside of the lower case 1114 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the upper case 1112 side. The fixed connector 1116 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1164 is provided with conductive portions 1130, 1132, 1134, 1136 respectively connected to 4 of the 6 pins of the fixed connector 1164. . Taking the conductive portion 1130 as an example, the conductive portion 1130 includes an elongated conductive plate 1130a and a fixture 1130b that fixes one end of the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114. The fixture 1130b fixes the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114 so that the conductive plate 1130b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1130b. The conductive portions 1132 to 1136 have the same configuration as the conductive portion 1130.

  In the present embodiment, the conductive portions 1130 to 1136 are used for power supply and GND connection, and signal communication is performed by optical communication (wireless communication). In the center of the lower case 1114, a data transmission / reception unit 1138 for optical communication is arranged. The data transmission / reception unit 1138 is connected to two of the six pins of the fixed connector 1114. In this embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1138 is used for signal transmission, but signal reception is also possible.

  FIG. 51C shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the lower case 1114 side. A rotation side substrate 1140 is disposed on the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120. The rotation side substrate 1140 is a slip ring. The rotation-side substrate 1140 has a circular shape and has a circumferential insulating portion 1142. A data transmission / reception unit 1144 is arranged at the center of the rotation side substrate 1140. The data transmission / reception unit 1144 is disposed to face the data transmission / reception unit 1138 so as to overlap the data transmission / reception unit 1138 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from above. Signal transmission / reception is performed between the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 by optical communication. The data transmission / reception unit 1144 is connected to two of the six pins of the rotation-side connector 1122. In this embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is used for signal reception, but signal transmission is also possible.

  In addition, circumferential wirings 1146, 1148, 1150, and 1522 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1142 of the rotation side substrate 1140. The wirings 1146, 1148, 1150 and 1152 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. Further, the insulating portion 1142 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 are concentrically arranged, and the data transmitting / receiving portion 1144 is provided at the center of the concentric circle. In FIG. 51 (c), the insulating portion 1142 and the wiring portions 1146 to 1152 are hatched to the right in order to easily distinguish the configurations.

  Four of the six pins and wires 1146 to 1152 are connected to the rotation-side connector 1122 of the rotation-side case 1120, respectively. The wiring 1146 is connected to the conductive portion 1130 shown in FIG. 51B, the wiring 1148 is connected to the conductive portion 1132 shown in FIG. 51B, and the wiring 1150 is connected to the conductive portion 1134 shown in FIG. The wiring 1152 is connected to the conductive portion 1136 shown in FIG.

  51D and 51E show a connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146. FIG. 51D and 51E show the conductive portion 1130 extracted by the AA line in FIG. 51B. The connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 is similar to the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 shown in FIGS. The connection state between the conductive portions 1132 to 1136 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 is the same.

  The conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 are used for supplying power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1132 and the wiring 1148 are used for supplying power to a circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1134 and the wiring 1150 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub board 160. The conductive portion 1136 and the wiring 1152 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160.

As an example of various signals transmitted / received between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.). The first sub-control unit 400 includes an effect command (command for specifying effect, progress of effect, still image, moving image, progress of image display scenario, etc.) for the microcomputer.
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be provided with image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, the image control provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 from the microcomputer. Image commands (commands that specify the progress of a still image, a moving image, an image display scenario, etc.) for the means.
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or image control means for controlling image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but is mounted on the first sub board 160 or the moving unit 1036, and the sub liquid crystal unit. The image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means or the like) may be mounted on the image 1032. Image data (for example, image data transmitted for a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.).

In the present embodiment, the data communication between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 is optical wireless communication. Laser light is used for optical wireless communication. Note that data communication between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 may be radio wave communication instead of optical wireless communication. In addition, in the optical wireless communication, LED light may be used instead of laser light.
When both the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 are used for signal transmission / reception, the data transmitted from the data transmission / reception unit 1138 to the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is as described above. For the unit 138, an ACK signal and a status signal from a control means provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 (for example, an image control means, a microcomputer for controlling the image control means, an image drive means (liquid crystal drive means), etc.) Information indicating the rotation angle of the rotating body (for example, a detection signal output when a sensor provided on the rotation side detects a detection piece provided on the fixed side, an output signal of an encoder provided on the rotation side, etc. ) May be transmitted.

  FIG. 51F is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has only the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 as the rotating body connecting shaft. The rotating body connection shaft 1124 is disposed at the center (rotation center) of the rotation side case 1120.

  FIG. 51G is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has rotating body connecting shafts 1124 and 1126 as rotating body connecting shafts. A straight line connecting the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the tip of the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 passes through the center (rotation center) of the rotating case 1120. Further, the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 are arranged at an equal distance from the center.

(Example 10)
FIG. 52 shows Production Example 1 in Example 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 52 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 52 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Also, the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 of the pachinko machine 100 of the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment and Examples 11 to 16 described later are different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. And is movable in the left-right direction on the front side of the movable body 1002.

  FIG. 52A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 52 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 52A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b.

  FIG. 52 (b) continued from FIG. 52 (a) shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Moreover, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon of a pre-reading notice mode as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 52 (c) continued from FIG. 52 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 52 (d) following FIG. 52 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 52 and subsequent figures, the decorative symbol variation display is indicated by a downward white bold arrow. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display is started after the movement animation of the hold / variation icon is started.

  FIG. 52E continuing from FIG. 52D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 52 (d).

  In FIG. 52 (f) following FIG. 52 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 has moved to a position located in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. FIG. 52 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the player so that it is difficult to visually recognize the right half area of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. A cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208c are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. In addition, a partial region on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmission portion 1008b. Note that the yacht image or cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. When the image of the yacht or the image of the cloud is shielded by the movable body 1008, there is a case where the possibility of being a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed may be higher than the case where the image is not shielded by the movable body 1008. Also good.

  FIG. 52 (g) shows the movable body 1002, the part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as FIG. 52 (f). It is hatched for this purpose. 52 (h) to 52 (k), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown in FIG. 52 (g). It is hatched to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. In FIG. 52 (g), an image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. Note that although a cloud image is displayed at a position behind the movable body 1008 below the transmissive portion 1008b, the cloud image is not visually recognized by overlapping the movable body 1008. In the present embodiment, the cloud image is an image displayed as a preview image.

  FIG. 52 (h) following FIGS. 52 (f) and 52 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 starts rotating. In FIG. 52 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated approximately 10 ° counterclockwise.

  FIG. 52 (i) following FIG. 52 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 52 (h). 52 (i) shows a cloud image that cannot be visually recognized by overlapping the movable body 1008 in the states of FIGS. 52 (g) and 52 (h). The state which became visible via 1008b is shown. In the pachinko machine 100, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated and the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not rotated and the cloud image is not visually recognized via 1008b. Compared to the above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special figure variable game being executed may be increased. Further, in this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated about 20 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 52 (h), so that the entire cloud image is visible through 1008b. Only a part of the cloud image may be visible through 1008b.

  FIG. 52 (j) following FIG. 52 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 52 (i). In FIG. 52 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 52 (j) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 52 (h) are the same, but in the state shown in FIG. 52 (h), the rotation angle is visually recognized through 1008b. Since the display of moving the image of the cloud that did not exist upward with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 was performed, a part of the image of the cloud is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 52 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. In some cases, the moving display of the image may be performed.

  FIG. 52 (k) following FIG. 52 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 52 (j) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. In FIG. 52 (k), the cloud image that was not visually recognized via 1008b in the state shown in FIG. 52 (g) is visually recognized via 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 52 (k) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 52 (g) are the same, but after the state shown in FIG. Since the display is moved upward in accordance with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, it is visually recognized through 1008 b in FIG. 52 (k). In addition, since the display of moving the cloud image upward is performed, the cloud image region visible through 1008b in FIG. 52 (k) is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. 52 (j). It is wider than possible cloud image area. In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 52 (k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. There may be a case where a moving image of a cloud image is displayed.

  In FIG. 52 (l) following FIG. 52 (k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Special Figure 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of variable display is a big hit.

  FIG. 53 shows Production Example 2 in Example 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 53 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 53 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 53A to 53F show the same state as FIGS. 52A to 52F. FIG. 53 (g) shows the movable body 1002, the part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as FIG. 53 (f). The movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from other structures. It is hatched for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 53 (h) to 53 (k) continuing from FIG. 53 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission part 1008b are extracted and shown. It is hatched to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. FIG. 53 (g) shows the same state as FIG. 52 (g). 53 (h) following FIGS. 53 (f) and 53 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started rotating, and shows the same state as FIG. 52 (h).

  FIG. 53 (i) following FIG. 53 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 53 (i). In FIG. 53 (i), unlike the state shown in FIG. 52 (i), the cloud image displayed behind the movable body 1008 is moved and displayed to the left as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. , 1008b, a state that is not visually recognized. Further, the cloud image may be erased as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, or may not be displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 53 (j) following FIG. 53 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 53 (i). In FIG. 53 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 52 (j), a cloud image is not visually recognized.

  FIG. 53 (k) following FIG. 53 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 53 (j) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. In FIG. 53 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 52 (k), a cloud image is not visually recognized.

  In FIG. 53 (l) following FIG. 53 (k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 3 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of sync.

  As described above, in the production of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may execute a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the player may be able to visually recognize the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 through the movable body 1006 or the transmission portion of the movable body 1008. is there. In this embodiment, the cloud image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that cannot be visually recognized by the movable body 1008 when the movable body 1008 moves to the left is displayed as a preview image. In the present embodiment, the movement of the movable body 1008 causes the player to visually recognize at least a part of the notice image via the transmission part 1008b, and at least the notice image via the transmission part 1008b. There is an effect when not letting the player visually recognize some images. In addition, when a part of the notice image is visually recognized by the player through the transmission part 1008b of the movable body 1008 due to the moving operation of the movable body 1008, As compared with a case where at least a part of the image is not visually recognized by the player, the big hit symbol pattern is more easily displayed as a final result of the symbol variation display.

  The cloud, balloon, and sun images displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be able to be moved and displayed as the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. For example, the cloud image displayed at the upper center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 206 moves so that the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized through the transmission part 1008a when the movable body 1008 moves leftward from the initial position. The balloon or the sun image may be displayed so that when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, it can be visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008a and the transmissive portion 1008b. Display may be performed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is configured such that when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, images of clouds, balloons, and the sun can be visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008a and the transmission unit 1008b. Compared to a case where images of clouds, balloons, and the sun cannot be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b, the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed may be increased. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 displays a moving image of a cloud, a balloon, and the sun when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, so that the cloud, the balloon, and the sun are transmitted via the transmission unit 1008a and the transmission unit 1008b. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the cloud, balloon, or sun image is not displayed to move through the transmissive portion 1008a or the transmissive portion 1008b. Compared to the case where images of clouds, balloons, and the sun can be visually recognized, the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed may be increased. Further, when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, images of clouds, balloons, and the sun when viewed through the transmissive portion 1008a and the transmissive portion 1008b are displayed in a color different from the normal time. There may be cases. For example, when the cloud image is normally displayed in white, and is visible through the transmissive part 1008a or the transmissive part 1008b when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, blue, green, or It may be displayed in red. When the cloud image is displayed in a color different from the normal time, the pachinko machine 100 wins a big hit in the special figure variable game being executed compared to the case where the cloud image is displayed in the normal color. You may be comprised so that the probability to do may become high. Further, there may be a case where the main liquid crystal unit 1001 performs a rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect shown in FIGS. 52 (g) to (k) or FIGS. 53 (g) to (k) of the present embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the sub display device 1030. There may be.

(Example 11)
FIG. 54 shows Production Example 1 in Example 11 of the present embodiment. FIG. 54 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 54 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 54A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 54A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010 and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b.

  FIG. 54 (b) continued from FIG. 54 (a) shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Moreover, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon of a pre-reading notice mode as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 54 (c) continued from FIG. 54 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 54 (d) following FIG. 54 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 52 and subsequent figures, the decorative symbol variation display is indicated by a downward white bold arrow. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display is started after the movement animation of the hold / variation icon is started.

  FIG. 54E continuing from FIG. 54D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 54 (d).

  In FIG. 54 (f) following FIG. 54 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 has moved to a position located in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. FIG. 54 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the player so that it is difficult to visually recognize the right half area of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. A cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208c are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. In addition, a partial region on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmission portion 1008b. Note that the yacht image or cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. When a yacht image or a cloud image is shielded by the movable body 1008, compared to a case where the image is not shielded by the movable body 1008, there is a higher possibility of being a big hit in a running special figure variable game. There may be.

  FIG. 54 (g) shows the movable body 1002, the part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as FIG. 54 (f). The movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from other structures. It is hatched for this purpose. 54 (h) to 54 (k), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown. The movable body 1008 is the same as the movable body 1008. It is hatched to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. In FIG. 54 (g), the movable body 1008 shields the right portion of the illumination portion 1014b, the lower end portion of the illumination portion 1014c, and a part other than the right end portion of the illumination portion 1014d, and illuminates via the transmission portion 1008b. The part excluding the shielded part of the part 1014c and the right end part of the illumination part 1014d are visible. FIG. 54G shows a state where the portions of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d that are visible to the player emit light in blue. In FIG. 54 (g), an image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 54H following FIGS. 54F and 54G shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 starts rotating. In FIG. 54 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated approximately 10 ° counterclockwise. In FIG. 54 (h), the area of the visible portion of the illuminating portion 1014d is reduced through the transmissive portion 1008b as compared with the state shown in FIG. 54 (g). Further, in the region not shielded by the movable body 1008, the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is increased.

  FIG. 54 (i) following FIG. 54 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 35 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 54 (h). In FIG. 54 (i), a black portion of the illumination unit 1014d indicates a portion that emits blue light, and a white portion indicates a portion that emits red light. In FIG. 54 (i), in a region that is not shielded by the movable body 1008, a portion of the illumination portion 1014d that is not visually recognized by the player by overlapping with the movable body 1008 can be visually recognized by the player. This shows the state. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the portion that emits red light is visible due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the portion that emits red light is visible because the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 does not rotate. Compared with the case where it does not become, it may be comprised so that possibility that it will be a big hit in the special figure fluctuation game in execution becomes high.

  FIG. 54 (j) following FIG. 54 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 35 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 54 (i). FIG. 54 (j) shows a state in which the area of the portion that emits red light in the illumination unit 1014d is large and the area of the portion that emits blue light is small. In FIG. 54 (j), a part of the cloud image as the preview image is visually recognized via 1008b. In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 52 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b, but the cloud image is visually recognized through 1008b. In some cases, the image may be displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is notified through the transmission unit 1008b when at least a part of the cloud image as the notification image is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. Compared to a case where at least a part of a cloud image as an image is not visually recognized, the cloud game may be configured to have a higher probability of being a big hit in the special figure fluctuation game being executed.

  FIG. 54 (k) following FIG. 54 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 54 (j) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. FIG. 54 (k) shows a state in which the area of the illuminating unit 1014d that emits red light is further increased, and the illuminating unit 1014d emits all red light. In FIG. 54 (k), a part of the cloud image as the preview image is visually recognized via 1008b. Further, the display of moving the cloud image upward is performed, so that the cloud image area visible through 1008b in FIG. 54 (k) is visually recognized through 1008b in FIG. 54 (j). It is wider than possible cloud image area. In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 54 (k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. There may be a case where a moving image of a cloud image is displayed.

  In FIG. 54 (l) following FIG. 54 (k), after the movable body 1008 moves to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Special Figure 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of fluctuation display is a big hit.

  FIG. 55 shows Production Example 2 in Example 11 of the present embodiment. FIG. 55 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 55 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 55A to 55F show the same state as FIGS. 54A to 54F. FIG. 55 (g) shows the movable body 1002, the part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b extracted at the same timing as FIG. 55 (f). The movable body 1008 is easily distinguishable from other structures. It is hatched for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 55 (h) to 55 (k) continuing from FIG. 55 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown. It is hatched to make it easier to distinguish from the configuration of. FIG. 55 (g) shows the same state as FIG. 54 (g). FIG. 55 (h) following FIGS. 55 (f) and 55 (g) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started rotating, and shows the same state as FIG. 54 (h).

  FIG. 55 (i) following FIG. 55 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 55 (i). Further, FIG. 55 (i) is different from the state shown in FIG. 54 (i) in that the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is small. The state which the light emission part is not visually recognized is shown.

  FIG. 55 (j) following FIG. 55 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 55 (i). Further, in FIG. 55 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 54 (j), the area of the illumination portion 1014d that emits red light is not large, so the portion of the illumination portion 1014d that emits red light is visible. Indicates a state that is not. Also, FIG. 55 (j) shows a state where the cloud image as the notice image is not visually recognized via 1008b, unlike the state shown in FIG. 54 (j).

  FIG. 55 (k) following FIG. 55 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated about 10 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 55 (j) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. In FIG. 55 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 54 (j), the area of the illuminating portion 1014d that emits red light is not large, so the portion of the illuminating portion 1014d that emits red light is not visually recognized. Indicates the state. Further, in FIG. 55 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 54 (j), a state where a cloud image as a preview image is not visually recognized via 1008b is shown.

  In FIG. 55 (l) following FIG. 55 (k), after the movable body 1008 returns to the initial position, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 3 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of sync.

  As described above, in the production of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may perform a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. The light emission mode of 1014d may change. In this embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by a maximum of 45 ° in the clockwise direction behind the movable body 1008, an effect of changing the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d is performed, and the sub liquid crystal is behind the movable body 1008. When unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by a maximum of 30 °, an effect is provided in which the light emission mode of illumination unit 1014d does not change. The pachinko machine 100 is being executed when the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d changes due to the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008, compared to the case where the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change. You may be comprised so that possibility that it will be a big hit in a special figure variable game becomes high.

Example 12
FIG. 56 shows an effect example in Example 12 of the present embodiment. FIG. 56 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 56 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 56A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Also, in the state shown in FIG. 56 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 56 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1010, 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b.

  FIG. 56 (b) continued from FIG. 56 (a) shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Moreover, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon of a pre-reading notice mode as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 56 (c) continuing from FIG. 56 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 56 (d) following FIG. 56 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 56E continuing from FIG. 56D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 56 (d).

  In FIG. 56 (f) continued from FIG. 56 (e), the movable body 1008 starts an effect operation from the state shown in FIG. 56 (e), and the left end of the transmission portion 1008 b of the movable body 1008 is the screen of the sub display device 1030. The state which moved to the position located in the left end is shown. FIG. 56 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 shields the player so that the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to see. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208b are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. In addition, the display area of the sub display device 1030 and the illumination unit 1014d are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. In addition, the yacht image and the cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 56 (g) continued from FIG. 56 (f) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008. Yes. In FIG. 56G, a cloud image as a preview image is displayed on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment hides behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 when an effect is performed in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Compared to the case where the performance is not performed, the special figure variation game being executed may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit.

  In FIG. 56 (h) continued from FIG. 56 (g), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state of FIG. The screen of the sub display device 1030 is shown visually. FIG. 56 (h) shows a state where a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 56 (i) following FIG. 56 (h) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 56 (h). FIG. 56 (i) shows a state in which a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 56 (j) continued from FIG. 56 (i) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has moved upward from the state of FIG. 56 (i) behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 56 (j) shows a state in which the cloud image as the preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 that has been viewed through the transmission unit 1008 b cannot be viewed.

  FIG. 56 (k) continuing from FIG. 56 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 56 (k) shows a state where a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. In FIG. 56 (k), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated through the transmission portion 1008b while the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008. The amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that is visually recognized changes. Further, the cloud image is moved upward from the state shown in FIG. 56 (i).

  56 (l) continued from FIG. 56 (k), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 45 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56 (k) (total 90 ° behind the movable body 1008). Rotated) is shown. FIG. 56 (l) shows a state in which a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. In FIG. 56 (l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated through the transmission portion 1008b while the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008. The amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 that is visually recognized changes.

  56 (m) continued from FIG. 56 (l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 110 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56 (l) behind the movable body 1008 (total 200 °). Rotated) is shown. FIG. 56 (m) shows a state in which the cloud image as the preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 56 (n) following FIG. 56 (m) shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 160 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56 (l) behind the movable body 1008 (total 360 °). Rotation) and the initial posture is returned. FIG. 56 (m) shows a state in which the cloud image as the preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  56 (o) following FIG. 56 (n), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. 56 (o) and returns to the initial position behind the movable body 1008. Shows the state. FIG. 56 (o) shows a state where a cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

  56 (p) following FIG. 56 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 56 (o) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 56 (p) shows a state where the rendering operation of each movable body (movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012) has been completed.

  FIG. 56 (q) continued from FIG. 56 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates behind the movable body 1008 so that the player can visually recognize the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 through the transmission portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. The amount of an image (for example, a cloud image as a preview image) may be configured to change, and the amount of the image in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 visually recognized by the player via the transmission unit 1008b of the movable body 1008 Compared to the case where the change does not change, the possibility of a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed may be increased. Further, there may be a case where the main liquid crystal unit 1001 performs a moving and rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.

(Example 13)
FIG. 57 illustrates an effect example in Example 13 of the present embodiment. FIG. 57 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 57 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 57 (a) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Also, in the state shown in FIG. 57 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 57A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. The sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

  FIG. 57 (b) following FIG. 57 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. ing. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a black circular hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Moreover, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon of a pre-reading notice mode as shown in FIG. The sub display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the same character image is displayed at the same time on the decorative design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030, compared to the case where the same character image is not displayed at the same time on the decorative design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030, There may be a case where the possibility of being a big hit in the figure variation game is increased.

  FIG. 57 (c) continuing from FIG. 57 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a change icon and a moving animation between the hold and change icons moving to the left is displayed.

  FIG. 57 (d) following FIG. 57 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  FIG. 57 (e) following FIG. 57 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 57 (d).

  FIG. 57 (f) continued from FIG. 57 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left portion of the movable body 1008 has moved to a position that hides the left portion of the screen of the sub display device 1030. Is shown. FIG. 57 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 is shielded so that the player can hardly see the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208b are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. FIG. 57F shows a state in which the balloon image displayed on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized. In addition, an image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

  In FIG. 57G continued from FIG. 57F, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008. The balloon image and the yacht image displayed on are shown in a state where they cannot be visually recognized. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment hides behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 when an effect is performed in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Compared to the case where the performance is not performed, the special figure variation game being executed may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit.

  FIG. 57 (h) following FIG. 57 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 57 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Yes. FIG. 57H shows a state in which an image of a balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b, and an image of a yacht cannot be visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008.

  FIG. 57 (i) following FIG. 57 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 57 (h). FIG. 57 (i) shows a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 240 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 57 (h) (total 300 ° rotation) behind the movable body 1008. ing. In FIG. 57 (i), an image of a part of the balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized in an area that is not shielded by the movable body 1008, and the yacht image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is displayed. Indicates a state where it cannot be visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008.

  FIG. 57 (j) following FIG. 57 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state of FIG. 57 (i). FIG. 57 (j) shows an operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 57 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Both the movement to the lower initial position is performed in parallel, and the initial posture and the state returned to the initial position are shown. FIG. 57 (j) shows a state in which both the balloon image and the yacht image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are erased.

  FIG. 57 (k) following FIG. 57 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 57 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 57 (l) continuing from FIG. 57 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  Thus, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at positions behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. Among the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is moved to a position behind the movable body 1008 when the image is configured not to be visible to the player. In some cases, only one character image is configured to be visible to the player. Also, if there is a specific character image (for example, a preview image) with one character image that is visible at that time, the specific character image with one character image that is visible at that time is There may be a case where the possibility of being a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed is higher than the case where there is no game. Further, one of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 indicates that both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. In some cases, it may be visible. When one of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is moved, both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. When it can be visually recognized, there is a higher possibility that it will be a big hit in the special figure variable game being executed, compared to the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized even if they move. There may be. In addition, one of the character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 indicates that both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. In the case where it can be visually recognized, compared to the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because they do not move, there is a high possibility of being a big hit in the special figure variable game being executed. It may be. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.

(Example 14)
FIG. 58 shows an effect example in Example 14 of the present embodiment. FIG. 58 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 58 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. Unlike the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 40, the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourteenth embodiment and the fifteenth and sixteenth embodiments described later are displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1030. .

  FIG. 58A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 58 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 58 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. The sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

  FIG. 58 (b) continued from FIG. 58 (a) shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circle normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG. The sub display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the same character image is displayed at the same time on the decorative design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030, compared to the case where the same character image is not displayed at the same time on the decorative design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030, There may be a case where the possibility of being a big hit in the figure variation game is increased.

  FIG. 58 (c) continued from FIG. 58 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the balloon image is erased.

  FIG. 58 (d) following FIG. 58 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 58 (d) shows a state where the sub-display device 1030 has finished the movement animation between the hold and change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 variable game. ing.

  FIG. 58 (e) following FIG. 58 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG.

  In FIG. 58 (f) continued from FIG. 58 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 is in a position to hide the fluctuation icon on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030. The moved state is shown. FIG. 58 (f) shows a state in which the player has shielded the movable body 1008 so that the player can hardly see the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative design display device 208 and a part of the decorative design 208b are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. FIG. 58 (f) shows a state in which the variation icon displayed on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 and the movable body 1008 overlap, so that the variation icon cannot be visually recognized. In addition, an image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

  FIG. 58 (g) continued from FIG. 58 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state of FIG. 58 (f). 58G, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008, is hidden by the movable body 1008, and is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The change icon and the yacht image are not visible. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment hides behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 when an effect is performed in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Compared to the case where the performance is not performed, the special figure variation game being executed may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit.

  FIG. 58 (h) following FIG. 58 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 58 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Yes. FIG. 58 (h) shows a state in which an image of a balloon is displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the image of the balloon is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. Further, the yacht image displayed on the sub display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized by overlapping the movable body 1008. In FIG. 58 (h), when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the notice mode (white rhombus). , The state where the change icon of the notice mode is visually recognized through the transmission part 1008b. In the effect of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the player may visually recognize that the variation icon of the normal mode changes to the notification mode via the transmission unit 1008b. The player may make the player visually recognize the change icon of the normal mode after the change to the notice mode.

  FIG. 58 (i) continuing from FIG. 58 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated 200 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 58 (h) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. FIG. 58 (i) shows a state where the balloon image, the yacht image, and the notice mode change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 overlap with the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 58 (j) continued from FIG. 58 (i) shows a state where the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 58 (i) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 58J shows a state in which the change icon of the notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. FIG. 58J shows a state in which the yacht image and the balloon image are not visible on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 58 (k) following FIG. 58 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 58 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 58 (l) following FIG. 58 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit.

  Thus, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, variation icons, and hold icons may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at positions behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. When the image, the change icon, and the hold icon are configured not to be visible to the player, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is positioned at a position behind the movable body 1008, the sub display device 1030 displays the image, the change icon, and the hold icon. In some cases, only one character image of the plurality of character images and only the variation icon are configured to be visible to the player. In addition, in the case where either one of the character images that can be visually recognized at that time is a specific character image (for example, a preview image) or the variation icon is in a notification mode, the image is visually recognized at that time. Even if there is a case where the one character image that has become possible is not a specific character image, and the variation icon is not in the notice mode, there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the special figure variation game being executed Good. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all of the character images, the change icons, and the like among the plurality of character images by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or only the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player. May be configured so that the player can visually recognize only the hold icon, or may be configured so that the player can visually recognize only the hold icon.

  Further, one of the character images and the change icons displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is moved by both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. It may be possible to visually recognize by performing. One of the character images and the change icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 moves both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Thus, if it can be visually recognized, there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the special figure variable game being executed as compared to the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized even if they move. May be higher. Further, one of the character images and the change icons displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is moved by both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. If it can be visually recognized by performing the game, it can be a big hit in the special figure variable game being executed as compared to the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because they do not move. The nature may be higher. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.

(Example 15)
FIG. 59 shows an effect example in Example 15 of the present embodiment. FIG. 59 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 59 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 59A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 59 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is zero. In the state shown in FIG. 59A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. The sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

  59 (b) following FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. FIG. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circle normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG. The sub display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the same character image is displayed at the same time on the decorative design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030, compared to the case where the same character image is not displayed at the same time on the decorative design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030, There may be a case where the possibility of being a big hit in the figure variation game is increased.

  FIG. 59 (c) following FIG. 59 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the balloon image is erased.

  FIG. 59 (d) following FIG. 59 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 59 (d) shows a state in which the moving animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 variable game is ended in the sub display device 1030. ing. FIG. 59 (d) shows a state in which the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circle normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG.

  FIG. 59 (e) following FIG. 59 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 59 (d).

  In FIG. 59 (f) following FIG. 59 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 moves to a position where the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden. Shows the state. FIG. 59 (f) shows a state where the movable body 1008 shields the player so that the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to see. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. FIG. 59 (f) shows a state where the hold icon cannot be visually recognized because the hold icon displayed on the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 overlaps the movable body 1008. In addition, the variation icon displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized in an area that is not shielded by the movable body 1008.

  FIG. 59 (g) following FIG. 59 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved leftward from the state of FIG. 59 (f). In FIG. 59G, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008 and displayed on the sub display device 1030. The change icon, the hold icon, and the yacht image are not visible. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment hides behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 when an effect is performed in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Compared to the case where the performance is not performed, the special figure variation game being executed may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit.

  FIG. 59 (h) following FIG. 59 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 58 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Yes. In FIG. 59 (h), when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed from the normal mode (white circle) to the pre-reading notice mode (white rhombus). In addition, the state where the fluctuation icon of the normal mode and the hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode are visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b is shown. In the effect of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the player may visually recognize that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the pre-reading notice mode through the transmission unit 1008b. In some cases, the player may make the player visually recognize the hold icon in the normal mode after the pre-read notice mode is changed.

  FIG. 59 (i) following FIG. 59 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 59 (h) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. Further, in FIG. 59 (i), the balloon image, the yacht image, the variation icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the pre-reading notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008. Indicates a state that cannot be performed.

  FIG. 59 (j) following FIG. 59 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 59 (i) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 59J shows a state in which the variation icon in the normal mode and the variation icon in the notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. In FIG. 59J, the yacht image is not visible on the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 59 (k) following FIG. 59 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 59 (j) and returned to the initial position.

  FIG. 59 (l) continuing from FIG. 59 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is out of place.

  FIG. 59 (m) following FIG. 59 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left is started.

  In FIG. 59 (n) following FIG. 59 (m), the sub-display device 1030 shows a moving animation between the holding / fluctuating icons in which the holding icon becomes a changing icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 variable game. The completed state is shown. FIG. 59 (n) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. A predetermined reach effect is started after FIG. 59 (n).

  FIG. 59 (o) continuing from FIG. 59 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is ended after the predetermined reach effect is ended. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit. As described above, the symbol variation started after digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the pre-reading notice mode is finally performed more than the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the normal mode. You may be comprised so that a big hit symbol aspect may be confirmed and displayed easily.

  Thus, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, variation icons, and hold icons may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at positions behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all the characters of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. When the image, the change icon, and the hold icon are configured not to be visible to the player, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is positioned at a position behind the movable body 1008, the sub display device 1030 displays the image, the change icon, and the hold icon. In some cases, only the variation icon and the hold icon are configured to be visible to the player. Moreover, when the hold icon which became visible at that time is a prefetch notice mode, compared with the case where the hold icon which became visible at that time is not a prefetch notice mode, there is a hold corresponding to the hold icon. There may be a case where the possibility of a big hit in a special figure variation game that is started after being digested becomes high. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all of the character images, the change icons, and the like among the plurality of character images by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or only the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player. May be configured so that the player can visually recognize only the hold icon, or may be configured so that the player can visually recognize only the hold icon.

  Further, the movable icon 1006 and the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1008 are used to move both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Thus, it may be visible. Of the movable body 1006 and the sub-display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1008, the fluctuation icon and the hold icon are displayed by both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 being moved. In the case where the object can be visually confirmed, compared to the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized even if the movable body performs the moving operation, the suspension of the target of the special figure variable game being executed or the suspension icon is not performed There may be a case where the possibility of a big hit in a special figure variable game started by being digested becomes high. Further, the movable icon 1006 and the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 in the position behind the movable body 1008 are used to move both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Thus, when it can be visually recognized, compared to the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because they do not perform the moving operation, the special figure variable game being executed or the target of the hold icon There may be a case where the possibility of a big hit in the special figure variable game that is started when the hold is digested becomes high. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.

(Example 16)
FIG. 60 shows an effect example in Example 16 of the present embodiment. FIG. 60 shows the effect state in time series. FIG. 60 shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 60A shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 2—decoration 3—decoration 4” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of place. ing. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 60A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. In addition, a part of the sun image displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the sun image is visible through the transmission part 1006a. It has become. In addition, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission unit 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. The sub display device 1030 displays a yacht image, a cloud image, and a seascape image.

  FIG. 60 (b) continuing from FIG. 60 (a) shows a state in which the number of holdings in FIG. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circle normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG. The sub display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the same character image is displayed at the same time on the decorative design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030, compared to the case where the same character image is not displayed at the same time on the decorative design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030, There may be a case where the possibility of being a big hit in the figure variation game is increased.

  FIG. 60C continuing from FIG. 60B shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). In addition, in the sub display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the hold / change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left is started. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the balloon image is erased.

  FIG. 60D, which continues from FIG. 60C, shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In addition, FIG. 60D shows a state in the sub display device 1030 in which the movement animation between the hold and change icons in which the hold icon becomes a change icon and moves to the left after the special figure 1 variable game is started is finished. ing.

  FIG. 60E continuing from FIG. 60D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG.

  FIG. 60 (f) continued from FIG. 60 (e) shows a state in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circle normal mode hold icon is displayed, and it is notified that the number of hold in FIG. In FIG. 60F, the movable body 1008 starts the rendering operation from the initial position, and the change icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized through the transmission part 1008b of the movable body 1008. It shows a state where it has moved to a position. FIG. 60F shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the player so that the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to see. In addition, a cloud image displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  In FIG. 60G continued from FIG. 60F, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008. The state where the fluctuation icon, the hold icon, and the yacht image displayed on are not visible. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment hides behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 when an effect is performed in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Compared to the case where the performance is not performed, the special figure variation game being executed may be configured to be more likely to be a big hit.

  FIG. 60 (h) following FIG. 60 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 58 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Yes. In FIG. 59 (h), when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed from the normal mode (white circle) to the pre-reading notice mode (white rhombus). In addition, the state where the fluctuation icon of the normal mode and the hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode are visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b is shown. In the effect of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, the player may visually recognize that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the pre-reading notice mode through the transmission unit 1008b. In some cases, the player may make the player visually recognize the hold icon in the normal mode after the pre-read notice mode is changed.

  FIG. 60 (i) following FIG. 60 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 60 (h) and returned to the initial posture. Yes. FIG. 60 (i) shows a state where the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030, the fluctuation icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the pre-reading notice mode cannot be visually recognized by overlapping the movable body 1008. ing.

  FIG. 60 (j) continuing from FIG. 60 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved downward from the state of FIG. 60 (i) and returned to the initial position. In addition, on the sub display device 1030, an image simulating a button, a character string image of “push” above it, and a meter image displaying the effective period of pressing the button are displayed overlapping the hold icon. Yes. In addition, the hold icon in the pre-read notice mode may be changed to an image imitating a button. FIG. 60J illustrates a state in which an image imitating a variation icon and a button and a character string image “push” above the image are visually recognized through the transmissive portion 1008b. The meter image is a movable body 1008. The state which cannot be visually recognized by being hidden by is shown. In FIG. 60J, the yacht image in the sub display device 1030 is in a state where it cannot be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 60 (k) continued from FIG. 60 (j), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the state of FIG. 60 (j), and the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission portion 1008a. The possible states are shown. FIG. 60K illustrates a state in which a “push” character string image displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008a. In addition, the fluctuation icon, the image imitating the button, and the meter image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are in a state where they cannot be visually recognized by being hidden by the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008a, the pachinko machine 100 that is being executed is compared with the case where the screen of the sub display device 1030 is not visually recognized. You may be comprised so that possibility that it will be a big hit in a figure fluctuation game becomes high.

  FIG. 60 (l) subsequent to FIG. 60 (k) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. FIG. In the sub display device 1030, when the player presses the chance button 136, the character string image of “push” is erased, and an image imitating the button and an effect image are displayed around it. FIG. 60 (l) shows a state in which the effect image is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

  FIG. 60 (m) following FIG. 60 (l) shows that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is shown in FIG. 60 (l) based on the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation effective period of the chance button 136. The state which moved from the state to the uppermost position is shown. FIG. 60 (m) shows a state in which a part of the button image and the effect image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a.

  FIG. 60 (n) subsequent to FIG. 60 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved rightward from the state of FIG. 60 (m) and returned to the initial position. The sub display device 1030 displays a variation icon, a button image, and an effect image.

  In FIG. 60 (o) following FIG. 60 (n), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation effective period of the chance button 136. The state is shown. FIG. 60 (o) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 60 (n).

  In FIG. 60 (p) following FIG. 60 (o), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated counterclockwise by 300 ° (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. After that, the state where it returned to the initial position below is shown. Further, the operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 that is executed in response to pressing of the chance button 136 is performed in parallel with both the operation of rotating counterclockwise and the operation of moving to the initial position below. In some cases, the initial posture and the initial position may be returned.

  FIG. 60 (q) subsequent to FIG. 60 (p) shows a state in which the button image and the effect image are erased in the sub display device 1030, and the variation icon in the normal state changes to the variation icon in the notice mode. FIG. 60 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is finished. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the middle left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and notified that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display is a big hit. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated based on the press of the chance button 136 during the symbol change, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 based on the press of the chance button 136 is performed. It may be configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is finally displayed in a definite manner in the symbol variation in comparison with the case where the rotation operation is not performed.

  As described above, in the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may display a plurality of character images, a variation icon, a hold icon, and an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at positions behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all of the character images among the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1008. When the image that prompts the player to press the change icon, the hold icon, and the chance button 136 is configured to be invisible to the player, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is positioned at a position behind the movable body 1008, In some cases, only a variation icon displayed on the display device 1030 and an image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 are both visible to the player. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment moves all of the character images, the change icons, and the like among the plurality of character images by moving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. The player may be able to visually recognize the hold icon and the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136, or the player can visually recognize only the hold icon and the image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. May be configured so that the player can visually recognize only the variable icon, or may be configured so that the player can visually recognize only the hold icon. Or the player may be able to see only the image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136. .

  In addition, the movable body 1006 and the image that prompts the user to press the hold icon 136 or the chance button 136 are displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1008. There may be a case where both movable bodies can be visually recognized by performing a moving operation. Of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, the image that prompts the user to press the change icon, the hold icon, or the chance button 136 displayed on the sub display device 1030 at the position behind the movable body 1008 is displayed on both When the movable body can be visually recognized by performing the moving operation, compared to the case where both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are not visible even if the movable body performs the moving operation, There may be a case where the possibility of a big hit in a special figure variable game started by digesting the target hold of the hold icon is high. In addition, the movable body 1006 and the image that prompts the user to press the hold icon 136 or the chance button 136 are displayed on the sub display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1008. When both of the movable bodies can be visually recognized by performing the moving operation, the change in the special figure being executed is compared with the case where both of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 are not visually recognized by not performing the moving operation. There may be a case where there is a high possibility of a big hit in a special figure variable game that is started by digesting the hold of the target of the game or the hold icon. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the decoration design display device 208 may execute the effect in the sub display device 1030 of the present embodiment.

(Example 17)
An effect example in sub display device 1030 of Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in FIG. 61 and each figure to be described later, an example of the special figure 1 variable game in each example is shown in time series. In addition, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030 is represented by white thick arrows. In the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 described later is displayed, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effect of the sub display device 1030. As another effect, for example, an effect of displaying a predetermined background or character without displaying a decorative design, or an effect of displaying a predetermined background or character by displaying a decorative design may be used. Good. In addition, during the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is being executed, the same effect as the effect of the sub display device 1030 may be executed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  First, common points of FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 described later will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 61A, a decoration frame F <b> 1 having a shape obtained by vertically inverting the character “L” is displayed in the upper left part of the display area of the sub display device 1030. A square-shaped special figure 1 reservation number display area 1931 is provided in the upper left part of the decorative frame F1, and a square special figure 2 reservation number display area 1932 is provided on the right side thereof. Below 1931, a special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 is provided, and below that, a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934 is provided. In the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931, the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no holding in the special figure 1, "0" is displayed. In the special figure 2 holding number display area 1932, the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no special figure 2 holding, "0" is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 4 symbol display area 1933, when the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, the fact that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed is notified as a variable display of the 4 symbol “/”. , “\” Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 1 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is stopped), the fourth symbol display is “-” or “◯”. An image is displayed. “-” Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place, and “◯” is the fourth graphic displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. is there. Note that “-” may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variable game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, when the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, the fact that the special figure 2 variable game is being executed is notified as a variable display of the fourth symbol "/". , “\” Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped), the fourth symbol display is “-” or “○”. An image is displayed. “-” Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, and “◯” is the fourth graphic displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. Note that “−” may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variable game regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variable game.

  A horizontally-long rectangular decorative frame F2 is displayed below the display area of the sub display device 1030. In the center of the decorative frame F2, a square-shaped variable icon display area 1940 in which a part of the left and right frames is opened is provided. Note that the variation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 1930 described later. This may facilitate identification of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is provided on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 1940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960 is provided on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 1940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from left to right. Each of the first to fourth areas corresponds to the first to fourth reserved orders in FIG. That is, a special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of special figure 1 that is the earliest (most recently stored) can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 1 hold can be displayed. Similarly, the special figure 2 reserved icon display area 1960 is roughly divided into four areas, ie, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth special figure 2 holding ranks, respectively. That is, a special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 2 stored in the first area can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. A special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 hold can be displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960, various animations representing movement of the hold icon are executed.

  A square-shaped navigation character display area 1970 is provided to the left of the special figure 1 hold display area 1950. In the navigation character display area 1970, a merchant character image H1 is displayed. The merchant character image H1 is used for an explanation effect such as a tutorial effect or a notice (notice of the change or a pre-read notice) effect.

  A square-shaped effect custom state display area 1980 is provided to the right of the special figure 2 hold display area 1960. In the effect custom state display area 1980, “level 1 to 99” are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 1000. The level of the effect custom state is set so as to increase when an effect with a low appearance rate is performed, for example. The level of the effect custom state may be set so as to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, when a predetermined effect is executed, or when a big win is won.

  FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4” indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. ing. In the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 1933, the 4th symbol in the display mode of “-” for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, the fourth symbol of the display mode of “-” for notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 displays “1” indicating that the special figure 1 hold number is 1, and the special figure 2 hold number display area 1932 indicates that the special figure 2 hold number is 0. “0” is displayed indicating that In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950, a default special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 has decreased by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 has become zero.

  When the special figure 1 hold is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the variable icon display area 1940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 of the sub-display device 1030 display the interval between the hold and change icons. The moving animation is executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 becomes the change icon 1941 and moves to the change icon display area 1940. . A right-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon 1941 in FIG. 61 (b) represents the moving direction of the variation icon 1941.

  In FIG. 61C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a of the sub display device 1030, the moving animation between the hold and change icons is finished, and the change icon 1941 is displayed in the change icon display area 1940. The displayed state is shown. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is white. The default special figure 1 hold icon 1952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 in FIG. 61 (b) represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952. In FIG. 61C, a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d. The balloon image is an image used for the advance notice by the merchant character image H1.

  FIG. 61 (d) shows a state where “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a and the right symbol display area 1030 c of the sub display device 1030. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 1953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 in FIG. 61 (d) represents the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953. In addition, the image of the character string “chance?” Is displayed in the balloon image representing the line of the merchant character image H1, and an effect that expects to develop into a reach effect is executed. In addition, a substantially square-shaped reserved change image H2 including an image of a character string of “holding change” is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b and the right symbol display area 1030c. . The hold change image H2 is an image that is displayed to notify that a pre-reading advance notice for changing the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon being displayed or an effect of the change notice is executed. In this example, it is notified that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed is changed is executed by the hold change image H2. The hold change image H2 may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon in FIG. 1 is changed, or a display that is displayed only when the hold icon in FIG. 2 is changed. Alternatively, it may be a display that is displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is changed, The display may appear only when the hold icon and the variation icon of the special figure 2 are changed, or only when the hold icon of the special figure 1, the hold icon of the special figure 2 and the fluctuation icon are changed. It may be a display.

  FIG. 61 (e) shows that “decoration 2—decoration 4—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is off. The informed state is shown. Further, an erasing animation in which the fluctuation icon 1941 displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 1940 moves downward is displayed, and the fluctuation icon 1941 is gradually deleted. FIG. 61 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 changes from “white to black” is executed. In the change animation, an image of lightning strike is displayed on the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 from the hold change image H2, and the effect image is displayed overlapping the special figure 1 hold icon 1951. The effect image is displayed on the front side of the special figure 1 hold icons 1952 and 1953, and the whole special figure 1 hold icon 1952 and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are hidden by the effect image.

  FIG. 61 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place is stopped and displayed. ing. Also, in FIG. 61 (f), the change animation ends, the hold change image H2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 61 (e) are deleted, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 changes from white circle to black circle. It has changed.

  FIG. 61 (g) shows a state in which the suspension of the first special figure 1 is completed and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Also, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 becomes a change icon, and a movement animation between the hold and change icons and a movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are started. ing. In FIG. 61 (g), a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d.

  FIG. 61 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are finished. Further, in FIG. 61 (h), an image of a character string “Tono” is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1, suggesting that a Tono character image H3 described later appears. Production is being performed. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 61 (i) shows a state where “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display area 1030d, and a character string image of “Call me?” Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the Tono. In addition, an image of a character string “Tono!” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1.

  FIG. 61 (j) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in a speech balloon image representing the speech of the merchant character image H1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in a speech speech image representing the speech of the character image H3. A string image is displayed. By displaying an image of a character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 61 (k) shows a screen of the sub display device 1030 in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player around the center of the sub display device 1030. The decorative display of the 4th symbol displayed in the 4th symbol display area 1933 of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. The decorative display of the 4th symbol displayed in the 4th symbol display area 1933 of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 61 (k) shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 compressed in the longitudinal direction due to space problems.

  FIG. 61 (l) shows the sub display device 1030 rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) as viewed from the player around the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 61 (k). The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. 61 (j) and (k), the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 before the rotation of the sub display device 1030 has an aspect ratio of 9:16 (the aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208). ), The image displayed on the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 61 (l) has an aspect ratio adapted to the screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. It is displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 rotated 90 ° counterclockwise is taken in the direction rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and is orthogonal to the horizontal axis. It is an aspect ratio when the vertical axis is taken in the direction. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 after rotation takes the horizontal axis in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction, and the vertical axis in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. The aspect ratio is

  FIG. 61 (m) shows the sub display device 1030 rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) as viewed from the player around the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 61 (k). The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed to the aspect ratio before the rotation.

  FIG. 61 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 61 (m) around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. Show. Also, in FIG. 61 (n), the hold change image H2 overlaps the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the lord during execution of the rotation display notice effect. Is displayed. The on-hold change image H2 displayed in FIG. 61 (n) is an image used for producing the notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In FIG. 61 (n), the screen of the sub display device 1030 is compressed due to space problems, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change.

  FIG. 61 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 61 (n) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. FIG. 61 (o) shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, a display indicating that lightning is generated from the on-hold change image H2 is performed, and an animation of lightning strike on the fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle is executed. The variation icon that has been struck by lightning overlaps the effect image, so that the entire variation icon is hidden by the effect image. FIG. 61 (o) shows that “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area. A special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second area 1950 appears as a result of an increase animation of the hold icon. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 954 is displayed in an enlarged manner as compared with other hold icons. For this reason, it may be possible to draw attention to the hold icon displayed in an enlarged manner to the player during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. In FIG. 61 (n), the screen of the sub display device 1030 is compressed due to space problems, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change.

  FIG. 61 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (a total of 315 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 61 (o) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Also, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 61 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping the entire variation icon 1941 are erased, and a character of “heat” is drawn in a circle. The fluctuation icon is enlarged. For this reason, it may be possible to draw attention to the fluctuation icon displayed in an enlarged manner to the player during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. In FIG. 61 (n), the screen of the sub display device 1030 is compressed due to space problems, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change. Next, in FIG. 61 (q), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 61 (p) (360 ° total rotation). 1030 shows a state where it has made one revolution and returned to its original state. Moreover, the hold icon and the fluctuation icon that have been displayed in an enlarged manner have returned to their normal sizes. Next, in FIG. 61 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. This indicates a state in which this is notified. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 1940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon is executed. A downward arrow shown at the upper left of the variation icon in FIG. 61 (r) represents the moving direction of the variation icon.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change. A character image or a decorative pattern may be used for the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the presence of the character image or the decorative pattern is enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image or the decorative pattern. There are cases where a strong impression can be given to the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates once (360 ° rotation), but the sub display device 1030 is configured to rotate more than one rotation by using the slip ring described above. May be. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the sub display device 1030, the higher the big hit reliability may be set.

  The aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change in relation to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030 as a variable, and based on the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. A display image may be generated using the work area of the VRAM 436. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change randomly. For example, when the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image using a random number, and generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio There may be. Further, the display area of the image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may be reduced. The aspect ratio of the image may change so that the display area is constant.

  In addition, when the rotation display announcement effect of the present embodiment is performed, the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variable game being executed is higher than when the rotation display notification effect is not performed. It may be. In addition, when the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes, compared to the case where the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change, in the special figure variable game being executed You may be comprised so that the probability of winning a jackpot may become high. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the frequency and the degree of change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the greater the frequency with which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. The greater the degree to which the aspect ratio changes, the higher the jackpot reliability may be.

  Further, in this embodiment, an effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon and the change icon during the rotation display notice effect is performed. When an effect that enlarges and displays the hold icon and the fluctuation icon is performed, the big hit symbol pattern is finally stopped and displayed, compared to a case where the effect that enlarges and displays the hold icon and the fluctuation icon is not performed. You may be comprised so that it may be easy. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, an effect in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated is performed. Instead of the rotation of the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated to rotate the decorative symbol display device. There may be an effect that the image displayed on 208 is rotated, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are rotated simultaneously or separately to thereby rotate the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display. There may be a case where an effect of rotating the image displayed on the device 1030 is performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 can be rotated, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that the sub display device 1030 cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 18)
An example of the effect of the sub display device 1030 in Example 18 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62 (a) to (r) display effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series. FIG. 62A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 61A. Next, FIG. 62 (b) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is digested and the special FIG. 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as FIG. 61 (b). Next, in FIG. 62C, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 is ended, and the variable icon display area 1940 is displayed. A change icon 1941 is displayed. Further, “1” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. FIG. 62C shows a balloon image immediately after the balloon image representing the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left portion of the effect display area 1030d. Indicates the state.

  FIG. 62D shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030 a and the right symbol display area 1030 c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the second area of the special figure 1 holding icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon has increased due to an increase animation. In addition, an image of a character string “chance?” Is displayed in a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1.

  FIG. 62 (e) shows that “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Indicates a state of being notified. Next, FIG. 62 (f) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is finished, and shows the same state as FIG. 61 (f). Next, FIG. 62 (g) shows a state in which the reservation of the first special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, showing the same state as FIG. 61 (g). Next, FIG. 62 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 have been completed, and shows the same state as FIG. 61 (h). Next, FIG. 62 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and the character image h3 of the lord is displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the same as FIG. 61 (i). Indicates the state.

  FIG. 62J shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, a character string image of “chance?” Is displayed in the speech balloon image representing the speech of the merchant character image H1, and then “chance!” Is displayed in the speech speech image representing the speech of the character image h3. A string image is displayed. By displaying an image of the character string “chance!” Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of Tono, it is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed.

  FIG. 62 (k) shows a screen of the sub display device 1030 in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise as viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. The decoration frame F1 displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the image displayed in the decoration frame F1 (reserved number display, fourth pattern image) (hereinafter, these images are referred to as “non-rotation target images”) Is prioritized over images other than the non-rotation target image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “rotation target image”) in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. It is displayed in the upper left. The decorative display of the 4th symbol displayed in the 4th symbol display area 1933 of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only some of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. There may be a case where only some of the non-rotation target images are displayed with priority over the rotation target image. FIG. 62 (k) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems.

  FIG. 62 (l) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 62 (k) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In addition, the non-rotation target image has priority over a part of the character image H3 of Yoshimune and a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the right symbol display area in the upper right part of the sub display device 1030. The movement is displayed in such a manner that it does not rotate when viewed from above. FIG. 62 (l) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems.

  62 (m) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 180 °) around the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 62 (l). . In addition, the non-rotation target image is moved and displayed in the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030 in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, in preference to the decoration frame F2.

  FIG. 62 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 62 (m) with the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. . In FIG. 62 (n), the pending change image H2 overlaps the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the lord during execution of the rotation display notice effect. Is displayed. The hold change image H2 displayed in FIG. 62 (n) is an image that is used to produce a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, the non-rotation target image is rotated in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 as viewed from the player in preference to a part of the decoration frame F2 and a part of the balloon image representing the merchant character image H1. It is displayed in a moving manner. Note that FIG. 62 (n) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems.

  FIG. 62 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 270 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 62 (n) with the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the rotation center. . FIG. 62 (o) shows a state in which the effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is executed. In the effect, an animation is performed in which lightning is generated from the hold change image H2 and lightning strikes the fluctuation icon displayed in a black circle. The variation icon that has been struck by lightning overlaps the effect image, so that the entire variation icon is hidden by the effect image. In FIG. 62 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding icon display area. A special figure 1 hold icon 1954 displayed in a black circle in the second area 1950 appears as a result of an increase animation of the hold icon. In addition, the non-rotation target image is given priority over a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the left symbol display area and a part of a balloon image representing a line of the merchant character image H1. In addition, the movement is displayed in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. FIG. 62 (o) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems.

  FIG. 62 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 62 (o) about the center of the sub display device 1030 as a rotation center (a total rotation of 315 °). Also, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 62 (o) and the effect image displayed so as to overlap the entire change icon are deleted, and the change of the aspect in which the characters “heat” are drawn in the circle An icon is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed smaller than the other hold icons. In addition, the non-rotation target image is moved and displayed on the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, in preference to a part of “decoration 3” displayed in the left symbol display area. Has been. FIG. 62 (p) shows a compressed screen of the sub display device 1030 due to space problems. Next, in FIG. 62 (q), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise (a total rotation of 360 °) around the center of the sub display device 1030 from the state of FIG. 62 (p). 1030 shows a state where it has made one revolution and returned to its original state. In addition, the non-rotation target image is displayed on the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 in a state where the non-rotation target image is not rotated as viewed from the player, and has returned to the state before the rotation display notice effect is executed. The special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed in the same size as other hold icons. Next, in FIG. 62 (r), “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. This indicates a state in which this is notified. In addition, when the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 1940 moves downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variation icon 1941 is executed.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the rotation display of the rotation target image is performed by rotating the sub display device 1030. In addition, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the decoration frame F1 displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the non-rotation target of the image (holding number display, fourth pattern image) displayed in the decoration frame F1 The image is displayed in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. In addition, when the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the probability of winning a big hit in the running special figure variable game is higher than when the rotation display notice effect is not performed. May be. Further, the non-rotation target image of the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed so as to be displayed at a conspicuous position of the sub display device 1030 when viewed from the player, in conjunction with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Further, any one of the decorative symbol, the Yoshimune character image H3, the spear character image H1, the hold icon, the change icon, the decorative frame F2, etc., or all the images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are not rotated. The image may be displayed in a mode that is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, in this case, the larger the number of non-rotation target images, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot in the special figure variation game being executed. Further, in place of the rotation of the sub display device 1030, there may be an effect that the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208. The display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be rotated simultaneously or separately to produce an effect of rotating the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so as to be unable to rotate and move.

Example 19
An effect example of the sub display device 1030 of Example 19 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63A to 63L show the special figure 1 variable game in time series. Note that, during the period in which the effects of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 63 and FIGS. 64 to 69 described later are displayed, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effects of the sub display device 1030. ing. The other effect may be, for example, an effect of displaying a decorative pattern and displaying a predetermined background or character.

  FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which “1” indicating that the number of holds in FIG. Yes. Next, FIG. 63 (b) shows that the hold in FIG. 1 is digested, and the hold number in FIG. In this state, “0” is displayed.

  FIG. 63C shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 63 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. The sub display device 1030 shows a state in which the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of rotation. In addition, the hold display area 1030e in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030. The “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. ° Rotated and displayed.

  FIG. 63E shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 63D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Is shown. The “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed with a rotation of 90 ° (a total rotation of 90 °). Next, in FIG. 63 (f), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (e) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (total rotation of 135 °). Shows the state. In addition, the hold display area 1030e in the upper left part of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper right part of the sub display device 1030. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. Rotated (total 135 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, FIG. 63 (g) shows that the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (f) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (180 ° total rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. Rotated (total 180 ° rotation) is displayed.

  FIG. 63H shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 225 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 63G with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Is shown. In addition, the hold display area 1030e in the upper right portion of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030. Further, the “0” image of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. (Total 225 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 63I, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 63H with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (total 270 ° rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image of the number-of-holds display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. (Total 270 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, FIG. 63 (j) shows that the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (i) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (a total rotation of 315 °). Shows the state. In addition, the hold display area 1030e in the lower right portion of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the original position in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the rotation center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. Rotated (total 315 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 63 (k), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (j) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (360 ° total rotation). Shows the state. Further, the “0” image as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the rotation center of the “0” image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. Rotated (total 360 ° rotation) is displayed. Next, FIG. 63 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect has ended, and the character image H3 of the lord is erased in the sub display device 1030.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image of the lord is rotated by rotating the sub display device 1030. Further, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the hold number display image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. In addition, the hold display area 1030e of the sub display device 1030 is moved so as to be displayed in the left corner of the sub display device 1030 when viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, during the rotation of the sub display device 1030, the hold number display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see. In addition, when the rotation display announcement effect of the present embodiment is performed, the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variable game being executed is higher than when the rotation display notification effect is not performed. It may be. Further, in the rotation display advance notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is configured to rotate once (360 ° rotation). It may be configured to. For example, the larger the number of rotations of the sub display device 1030, the higher the big hit reliability may be set. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the decorative design display device 208 may produce the effect of the present embodiment, or the decorative design display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are rotated simultaneously or separately. Thus, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 20)
An effect example of Example 20 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 64A to 64K show effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 64A shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 64B shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 64C shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. FIG. 64C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Next, FIGS. 64D to 64J show a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 64D to 64J, the character image H3 is displayed by rotating clockwise at the same rotational speed as the rotational speed of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player's character image H3 is always viewed as not rotating. Next, FIG. 64 (k) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect has been completed, and the character image H3 of the lord is deleted on the sub display device 1030.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image H3 displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. By displaying, the character image is displayed in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. For this reason, since the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not rotate even though the sub display device 1030 is rotating, there are cases where the player can be surprised. In addition, when the rotation display announcement effect of the present embodiment is performed, the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variable game being executed is higher than when the rotation display notification effect is not performed. It may be. In this embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030, the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Alternatively, the character image may be rotated and displayed at a different speed. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, there may be an effect that the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are rotated simultaneously or separately. An effect may be performed.

(Example 21)
An effect example of Example 21 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65 (a) to 65 (l) show effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 65A shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 65B shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 65C shows a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. FIG. 65C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Also, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed in a slightly compressed state in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 65 (b). Next, in FIG. 65D, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 65C about the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as a rotation center (total 90 ° rotation). Shows the state. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Moreover, the character image H3 of Tono is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged and displayed in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 65 (c). Next, in FIG. 65E, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 65D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center (a total rotation of 135 °). Shows the state. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Further, the character image H3 of Tono is slightly expanded in the horizontal direction and compressed and displayed in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 65 (d). Next, in FIG. 65F, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 65E with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation (180 ° total rotation). Shows the state. In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is centered on the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. For this reason, the player's character image H3 is visually recognized as not rotating. Further, the character image H3 of the lord is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 65 (e), and the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the lord is shown in FIG. It has returned to the state of (b). Next, FIGS. 65G to 65J show a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 65 (g) to 65 (j), the character image H3 is displayed by rotating clockwise at the same rotational speed as the rotational speed of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, while the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player's character image H3 is always viewed as not rotating. In FIGS. 65 (g) to 65 (j), the aspect ratio of the character image H3 is not changed. Next, FIG. 64 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect has ended, and the character image H3 of the lord is deleted on the sub display device 1030.

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image H3 displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. By displaying, the character image is displayed in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes. For this reason, since the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not rotate even though the sub display device 1030 is rotating, the player may be surprised and the character image By changing the aspect ratio, the presence of the character image is enhanced, and a strong impression may be given to the player. In addition, when the rotation display announcement effect of the present embodiment is performed, the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure variable game being executed is higher than when the rotation display notification effect is not performed. It may be. In this embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030, the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Alternatively, the character image may be rotated and displayed at a different speed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the frequency and the degree of change in the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, it may be configured such that the greater the frequency with which the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot, or the sub image is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The greater the degree of change in the aspect ratio of the character image, the higher the reliability of the big hit may be. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 22)
An effect example of Example 22 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66A to 66F show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 66A shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 66B shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is an image used for a lateral movement display effect as a reach effect.

  66 (c) to 66 (e) show a state in which a lateral movement display effect as a reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 moves in the left-right direction in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in the diagrams of FIGS. 66C to 66E indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before moving in the left-right direction.

  FIG. 66 (c) shows a state where the sub display device 1030 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 66 (b). In addition, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a manner of moving rightward by the same distance as the leftward movement distance of the sub display device 1030. Yes. For this reason, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been overlooked in the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the upper left part. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for the advance notice with a high hit reliability.

  FIG. 66 (d) shows a state where the sub display device 1030 has moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. 66 (c). Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in such a manner that it is moved to the right by the same distance as the left movement distance of the sub display device 1030. For this reason, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed so that it may be visually recognized so that it may not move, seeing from a player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed at the upper left.

  FIG. 66E shows a state where the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the left by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 in the right direction. For this reason, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed so as not to move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the upper left part, and a part of the princess character image H4 is out of view.

  FIG. 66F shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 66E, and the lateral movement display effect as the reach effect has been completed. The character image H3 displayed on the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in such a manner that it moves to the left by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 in the right direction. For this reason, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed in a mode in which it does not move as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed.

  In this way, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 is moved sideways. Therefore, the character image H3 of Tono is displayed in a mode in which the character image H3 does not move as viewed from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 that was completely overlooked in the sub display device 1030 before the lateral movement display notice effect is executed is displayed next to the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. When the moving display is performed, the display is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The princess character image H4 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance. For this reason, the player pays attention to the distance traveled by the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the effect during the symbol variation, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally the big hit symbol aspect compared to the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured so that the fixed stop is easily displayed. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, a character combined with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed may be displayed. For example, when the big hit reliability is relatively low, the enemy character may be displayed. The princess character image H4 is displayed when the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance in the left direction, whereas the enemy character of the lord is displayed when the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance in the right direction. May be displayed. Further, the character ratio H3 and the princess character image H4 used for the lateral movement display notice effect in this embodiment may change in aspect ratio during the lateral movement display notice effect. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 23)
An effect example of Example 23 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (a) to 67 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 67A shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, FIG. 67B shows a state in which the character image H3 is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. FIG. 67B-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67B. . The image data shown in FIG. 67 (b-1) has a princess character image H3 and a princess character image H4 at the lower left of the lord character image H3. It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for the advance notice with a high hit reliability. 67 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 67 (b-1) in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 67 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out from the center of the image data as display data. FIG. 67B-3 shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 67B-2.

  67 (c) to 67 (e) show a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. Rotated by 45 °. In addition, a rectangle indicated by a two-dot chain line in the diagrams of FIGS. 67C to 67E indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before rotation. In addition, the arrows shown in FIGS. 67C to 67E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 67C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67B with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. . Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been seen from the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the lower left part in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 67 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 67 (c-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 67 (b-1) is rotated by 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 67 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 67 (c-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 67 (c-1) with the center of the image data as the center. 67 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 67 (c-2), and rotates the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 (b). 6 shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG.

  FIG. 67D shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has been rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67C with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower left part in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. 67 (d-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 67 (d-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 67 (c-1) is rotated 15 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 67 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 67 (d-1) to display the image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 67 (d-1) with the center of the image data as the center. 67 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 67 (d-2), and rotates the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 (e). 6 shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG.

  FIG. 67E shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower left portion in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, and the other part is out of view from the sub display device 1030. FIG. 67 (e) shows a state immediately before the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect ends. FIG. 67 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 67 (e-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 67 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. This is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). 67 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 67 (e-1) in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 67 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 67 (c-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 (d). This shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. FIG. 67 (e-3) shows the same state as FIG. 67 (c-3).

  FIG. 67 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 67 (e) by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Is shown. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed. 67 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 67 (f-1) is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in FIG. 67 (e-1) is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 67 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 67 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 67 (f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 67 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 67 (f-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 (e). A state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 67 (f) is shown. FIG. 67 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 67 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated and displayed at the same speed in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of Tono is displayed in such a manner that it is not rotated when viewed from the player. In addition, in the rotation display announcement effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 that has been overlooked on the sub display device 1030 before the rotation display announcement effect is executed is rotated and displayed on the sub display device 1030. Is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Also, the princess character image H4 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the sub display device 1030 rotates more than a predetermined angle. For this reason, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, the princess character image H4 may be displayed on the upper left of the character image. In this case, the princess character image H4 displayed before the rotation is not visible on the sub display device 1030 as the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise. Further, by adjusting the display position of the princess character image H4, the sub display device 1030 can be seen from the sub display device 1030 by rotating more than a predetermined angle. For this reason, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game.

  In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4 is displayed by the rotation of the sub display device 1030. However, the character is displayed in accordance with the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. It may be. For example, when the big hit reliability is relatively low, the enemy character may be displayed. In addition, the princess character image H4 is displayed by rotating the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, whereas the sub display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle to display the enemy of the lord. A character may be displayed. Moreover, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 and the princess character image H4 used for the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect. In addition, in the effect during the symbol variation, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally the big hit symbol aspect compared to the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured so that the fixed stop is easily displayed. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 24)
An effect example of Example 24 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68 (a) to 68 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in time series.

  FIG. 68A shows a state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. A state in which nothing is displayed on the sub display device 1030 is shown. Next, in FIG. 68B, the sub display device 1030 moves downward, and the character image H <b> 3 of the lord is displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 and the merchant character image H <b> 1 is displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 1030. The state is shown. The character image H3 of Tono is a character image used for the “rotation” notice effect (hereinafter also referred to as “rotation display notice effect”) shown in FIG. FIG. 68 (b-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68 (b). The image data shown in FIG. 68 (b-1) has a princess character image H3 and a princess character image H4 at the lower left of the lord character image H3. It is the image data of the aspect which is not rotating. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for the advance notice with a high hit reliability. 68B-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 68B-1 to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68B. The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 is cut out from the center of the image data as display data. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 68 (b-2) is displayed at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 68 (b-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image H1 read from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 68B-3 shows a state where an image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 68B-2. The merchant character image H1 is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 68 (b-1), but the image data shown in FIG. 68 (b-1) is given priority over the merchant character image H1. May be displayed.

  68 (c) to 68 (e) show a state in which a rotation display notice effect as a reach effect has been executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and then clockwise. Rotated by 45 °. Moreover, the rectangle shown with the dashed-two dotted line in the figure of FIG.68 (c)-(e) has shown the position of the sub display apparatus 1030 before rotation. In addition, arrows shown in FIGS. 68C to 68E indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

  FIG. 68C shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68B with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. . Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 68B by the rotation of the sub display device 1030, so that the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 is displayed. Is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise around the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 that has been seen from the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the lower right side of the character image H1 in a manner that is not rotated when viewed from the player. FIG. 68 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68 (c). The image data shown in (c-1) of FIG. 68 is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in (b-1) of FIG. 68 is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 68C-2 uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 68C-1 to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68C. The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area with an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 68 (c-1) around the center of the image data. The display data shown in FIG. 68 (c-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 68 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 68 (c-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image H1 read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. 68 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 68 (c-2), and rotates the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68 (b). 6 shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG.

  FIG. 68D shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has rotated 15 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68C with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. . Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. Is rotated 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of rotation. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the entire princess character image H4 is displayed on the right side of the merchant character image H1 in an unrotated manner as viewed from the player. Further, FIG. 68D-1 shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. The image data shown in (d-1) of FIG. 68 is image data in a mode in which the image data shown in (c-1) of FIG. 68 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise around the center of the image data. 68 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 68 (d-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 from the image data shown in FIG. 68 (d-1) with the center of the image data as the center. The display data shown in FIG. 68 (d-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 68 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 68 (d-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image H1 read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. 68 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 68 (d-2), and rotates the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68 (c). 6 shows a state rotated by 15 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG.

  FIG. 68E shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68D with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 68D by the rotation of the sub display device 1030, so that the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 is displayed. Is displayed in a manner that it is rotated 15 ° clockwise around the rotation center. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the lower right side of the character image H1 in a manner not rotated when viewed from the player, and the other part is out of view from the sub display device 1030. ing. FIG. 68 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. FIG. 68 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 68 (e-1) is image data in a form in which the image data shown in FIG. 68 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image data. 68 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 68 (e-1) to display the image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. The display data shown in FIG. 68 (e-2) is first displayed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 68 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 68 (e-1). This is display data in which merchant character images H1 read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 are superimposed. 68 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 68 (e-2), and moves the sub display device 1030 clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68 (d). The state rotated 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. 68 (d) is shown.

  FIG. 68F shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 68E by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center. Is shown. Further, the character image H3 displayed at the center of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed in the lower left portion of the sub display device 1030 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 68E by the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of rotation and returned to its original state. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the princess character image H4 is not displayed. FIG. 68 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68 (f). The image data shown in (f-1) of FIG. 68 is image data in a form in which the image data shown in (e-1) of FIG. 68 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the rotation center. This is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 68 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 68 (f-1) to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 68 (f). The generated display data is shown. Also, the display data shown in FIG. 68 (f-2) is displayed at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 68 (b-1). This is display data obtained by superimposing the merchant character image H1 read from the ROM 406, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 68 (b-2). 68 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 68 (f-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 68 (e). This shows a state rotated by 30 °, and shows a state of the sub display device 1030 in FIG. FIG. 68 (f-3) shows the same state as FIG. 68 (b-3).

  As described above, in the rotation display advance notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image (donor character image H3) displayed on the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030 in a manner that does not rotate when viewed from the player. And a princess character image H4) and a character image (merchant character image H1) displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player. In the rotating sub display device 1030, a character image displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player and a character image displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player are displayed simultaneously. There are cases where unexpected surprises can be given to the player. In addition, in the effect during the symbol variation, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed, the symbol variation display is finally the big hit symbol aspect compared to the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured so that the fixed stop is easily displayed. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. May be performed. In addition, when performing the effect of the present embodiment on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated and moved.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 68 again.

(D1)
A gaming machine including a first movable body (for example, a movable body 1002) capable of performing a production operation that produces a game,
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) or a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 2000),
When the power is turned off, the first movable body is configured to move from a second position (for example, an initial position) to a first position (for example, a lowermost position),
When the power is turned on, the first movable body is configured to move from the first position (for example, the lowest position) to the second position (for example, the initial position). ,
The second position and the first position are different positions,
The production operation is configured to start from the second position (for example, an initial position) and end at the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the durability of the driving means for driving the first movable body may be improved.

(D2)
The game stand according to (D1) above,
When the first movable body (for example, movable body 1002) is turned off in a state where the first movable body (for example, movable body 1002) is located at a position different from the second position (for example, initial position), the first movable body is Configured to move to the first position,
A game stand characterized by that.

(D3)
The game stand according to (D1) or (D2) above,
The production operation includes an operation of moving to a third position (for example, the uppermost position),
The third position and the first position are different positions;
The third position and the second position are different positions.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D4)
The game table according to (D3) above,
Image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided in front of the image display means,
The third position is a position in front of the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D5)
The game stand according to (D4) above,
A big hit action (for example, a big hit game effect) can be executed,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means (for example, the decorative design display device 208),
When the first movable body is located at the third position (for example, the uppermost position), at least a preview image (for example, a cloud image or a balloon image) displayed on the image display means. In some cases, the first movable body may overlap,
The notice image is the notice image of the jackpot,
A game stand characterized by that.

(D6)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on,
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in (D1) above means that “the first movable body moves from the first position to the initial operation. ”And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation” (see, for example, FIGS. 43 (c) to (g)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D7)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above,
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on,
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in (D1) above means that “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position. After moving to the position, start the initial operation, and move to the second position again at the end of the initial operation ”(see, for example, FIGS. 45 (n) to (p)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D8)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D7) above,
“When the power is turned off” described in (D1) above is “when the main power of the game machine is turned off”
“When the power is turned on” described in (D1) above is “when the main power of the game machine is turned on”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D9)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D8),
The first movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is a movable body capable of changing the posture.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D10)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D9) above,
A second movable body (for example, a movable body 1006) capable of performing a production operation for producing a game;
The second movable body is a movable body that starts operation from a position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D11)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(D12)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

  All the rendering operations of the first rendering movable body are configured to start from the second position and end at the second position.

(D13)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (12) above,
The production operation may start from the second position and end at the fourth position,
The stage operation may start from the fourth position and end at the second position,
The fourth position is a position different from the first position;
The fourth position is a position different from the second position;
The fourth position is a position different from the third position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D14)
The game table according to (D13) above,
The production operation may start from the fourth position and end at the fourth position.
A game stand characterized by that.

(D15)
The game stand according to (D13) or (14) above,
The first movable body is configured to move from the fourth position to the first position even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the fourth position. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(D16)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D15) above,
The first movable body is configured to move from the third position to the first position even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the third position. ing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(D17)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D16),
Fourth control means for controlling the movable body;
And a driving means for driving the movable body.

  The first control means is the main control unit 300 that performs a lottery (for example, a big hit lottery or the like) advantageous to the player. The first control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards.

  The second control means is an effect means (for example, an illumination unit (LED, etc.), a sound output means (speaker, etc.), an image display means (liquid crystal display) that produces a game in response to a command signal from the first control means. Sub-control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) for effect control of the apparatus, dot matrix, etc. The second control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits. Alternatively, the second control means may draw lots of effects to be performed by the effect means in accordance with, for example, drive control of the effect means or a command signal from the first control means. Make a selection.

  The third control means is an effect control means for performing effect control (for example, drive control) of the effect means by communicating with the second control means. The effect control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards. The third control means may control the effect means according to the effect command from the second control means, determine the effect to be executed according to the effect command from the second control means, Information based on the determined result may be returned to the second control means, or the rendering means may be driven.

  The fourth control means is an effect control means that performs communication with the third control means and performs effect control of one or more or all of the sub liquid crystal unit 1030 and the movable bodies 1002 to 1012. The fourth control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards, and the fourth control means is supplied from the third control means. You may make it control an effect means according to an effect command, determine the effect performed according to the effect command from a 3rd control means, and return the information based on the determined result to a 3rd control means. The fourth control means may be mounted on the moving unit 1036. The fourth control means may be mounted on the moving unit 1036.

(D18)
The game stand according to (D17) above,
The fourth control means is mounted on a drive unit (for example, the moving unit 1036),
The drive unit performs the same operation during at least one operation (for example, up and down movement) of a plurality of operations by the movable body.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the above embodiment, since the moving unit 1036 is provided on the movable body 1002, when the movable body 1002 moves up and down, the moving unit 1036 also operates together with the movable body 1002, but the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. In this case, the moving unit 1036 is configured not to rotate. Note that the moving unit 1036 may be arranged separately from the moving body 1002 so that the moving unit 1036 does not operate together when the movable body 1002 is moved up and down, and also when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated, The moving unit 1036 may be configured to operate together, or the moving unit 1036 may be configured to operate together during all operations of the movable body 1002.

  Although the movable body 1002 has been shown as an example capable of executing an up / down operation (position change and movement) and a rotation operation (posture change), an operation other than up / down (for example, a position change / movement in the left-right direction) may be executed. Tilt operation (for example, an operation in which the left and right sides of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are tilted forward and rearward about the vertical rotation axis, and an upper side and a lower side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are forward and backward about the horizontal rotation axis. It may be possible to execute an operation of tilting backward.

(D19)
The game stand according to any one of (D1) to (D18) above,
Fourth control means for controlling the movable body;
Driving means for driving the movable body;
Detecting means for detecting the position of the first movable body,
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the position of the first movable body is confirmed,
When the position of the first movable body is not the first position, the first movable body is configured to move to the first position;
The confirmation condition is a condition that is satisfied when the power is turned off.
A game table characterized by

(E1)
An image display unit (for example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 or the sub liquid crystal unit 1032) capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game;
Drive means (for example, a motor) for driving the image display unit;
A game machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by driving the driving means,
In a period (hereinafter referred to as “first period”) in which the image display unit is moving in a first direction (a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit or a linear direction). The unit may display a first moving image (for example, a moving image of Tono character image H3 or Princess character image H4),
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image moves in the first direction (see, for example, FIGS. 68B to 68D).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the impact is given by the movement of the image display unit, and the display angle and the display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the period of the movement, so that the notification means May be able to perform operations that are not seen on a daily basis, and may allow the player to forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game. Further, the entire period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. In addition, with an effect as a trigger, the entire period of the period from when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period, or with an effect different from a certain effect as a trigger, A part of the period from when the image display unit starts to move in the first direction until it stops may be set as the first period.

(E2)
The gaming machine according to (E1) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the first image (see, for example, FIGS. 68B to 68D).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the example according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the expression, outer shape, and the like of the first image (dono character image H3 and princess character image H4) are fixedly displayed. The outer shape or the like may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, FIG. 68 will be described as an example. The face of the palace that was not displayed in FIG. 68 (a) is displayed as a true face in FIG. 68 (b), and a little smile is shown in FIG. 68 (c). An animation may be performed in which a full smile is obtained in 68 (d), a slight smile is returned in FIG. 68 (e), and a true face is returned in FIG. 68 (f). Further, the aspect in which the first image (for example, the character image H3 of the lord) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image H3 of the lord moves. Animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of the lines (change display from partial character string indicating the line to the entire character string, etc.), character and icon The color may be changed, the character or icon may be moved or displayed, or a combination of these may be included.

(E3)
The game stand according to (E1) or (E2) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction (for example, a counterclockwise direction) (for example, see FIGS. 68B to 68D),
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction (for example, a clockwise direction) (for example, FIG. 68 (b-1), (c-1), (See (d-1))
The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In a gaming machine having such a configuration, the first direction when the image display unit operates is triggered by a certain effect (for example, arrival of the timing for starting the image display unit operation effect during super reach). (For example, the left-facing direction) and other effects (for example, the timing of starting the effect by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether or not the probability change at the end of the big hit starts) The first direction when the display unit operates may be a different direction (for example, right direction). In addition, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction instead of the opposite directions. In this case, the player can make the first image move or rotate faster than the image display unit moves or rotates. Is visible. For this reason, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary feeling that cannot be obtained in a mode in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit further increases the speed. Rotating and moving can cause you to forget your everyday sensations and concentrate on the game.

(E4)
The game stand according to (E3) above,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction;
The first speed and the second speed are the same (for example, FIGS. 68 (b) to (d) and FIGS. 68 (b-1), (c-1), (d-1). )reference),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the image display unit appears to move to the player, but the display position / display angle of the first image does not seem to move, so that it is unusual for the notification means. When it is possible to perform a normal operation, the notification itself by the image display unit display can play the same role as when it is not moving, and it is possible to achieve both the impactful operation and the notification There is. Further, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite directions, and the first speed and the second speed may be different. In this case, the first direction and the second direction may be different from the movement or rotation of the image display unit. One image is visually recognized by the player so as to move or rotate slowly. For this reason, a mode in which an image rotates in a fixed image display unit is routinely seen on a TV, a network, or the like. The first image in the image display unit moves and rotates so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation of the image display unit. You may be able to forget and concentrate on the game. In addition, when the image display unit moves and rotates quickly with an emphasis on impact, by moving and rotating the first image gently, the notification itself by the image display unit display is close to when it is not moving, It may be possible to fulfill the role of notification.

(E5)
The game stand according to any one of (E1) to (E4) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image H1) is displayed (for example, see FIG. 68).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E6)
The game stand according to (E5) above,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction (for example, see FIGS. 68B-2, C-2, and D-2). ),
A game stand characterized by that.

  The gaming machine having this configuration may be configured not to display a second image that does not move in the first direction during the first period. That is, in the first period, since all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, the movement of the image display unit and the image is given a unified feeling and more impactful. There are cases where the production operation can be executed.

(E7)
The game stand according to (E5) or (E6) above,
The first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the example according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the expression, outer shape, and the like of the second image (merchant character image h1 ′) are fixedly displayed. The expression, outer shape, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, referring to FIG. 36, the merchant's face that was not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 36 (a) is displayed as a true face in FIG. 36 (b), and a little in FIG. 36 (c). The animation may be a steep face, a steep face in FIG. 36 (d), a slightly steep face in FIG. 36 (e), and a straight face in FIG. 36 (f). The aspect in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the animation display position does not move. Animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of the lines (change display from partial character string indicating the line to the entire character string, etc.), character and icon The color may be changed, the character or icon may be moved or displayed, or a combination of these may be included.

(E8)
The game stand according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in (E1) means “rotating by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (E1) means “the first image rotates in the first direction”.
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit (for example, see FIG. 68).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E9)
The game stand according to (E3) or (E4) above,
The first direction is one of clockwise and counterclockwise (for example, see FIG. 68),
A game stand characterized by that.
(E10)
The game stand according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above,
“Moving by driving the driving means” described in (E1) means “moving linearly by driving the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (E1) above means “the first image moves linearly in the first direction” (for example, see FIG. 66). ),
A game stand characterized by that.

  The above-mentioned “the first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “the first image linearly moves in the vertical direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned “first image linearly moves in the first direction” may mean “first image linearly moves in the left-right direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of the left direction and the right direction. The above-mentioned “first image linearly moves in the first direction” may be “first image linearly moves in an oblique direction”. In this case, the first direction is one of the upper left direction, the lower right direction, the upper right direction, and the lower left direction.

  A modification of the configuration described in the example according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, the movement of the driving means may be a combination of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, left-right direction, diagonal direction, front-rear direction as viewed from the player). Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to include a plurality of image display units. Further, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. The image display unit may be equipped with an LED or a production movable body. Further, before the image display unit is rotated or moved, the production movable body is moved from the initial state to the movable state, and after the image display unit in which the production movable body is in the movable state performs the rotation operation or the movement operation. It may be configured such that the stop movable body is then moved to the initial state. In addition, during the symbol variation display, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display is more effective when the effect operation illustrated in FIG. 64 is performed than when the effect operation illustrated in FIG. 63 is performed. The aspect may be configured to easily become a big hit aspect, and when the effect operation of FIG. 63 is performed during the design variation display, the effect operation of FIG. 63 is performed. It may be configured such that the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display tends to be a big hit mode. Further, when the effect operation of FIG. 63 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a big hit mode. When the effect operation of FIG. 64 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the big hit mode. 63 and 64 both show an example in which the same effect display is performed, but when the sub display device shown in FIG. 63 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display device also rotates together. The effect visually recognized by the player and the effect visually recognized by the player so that the image displayed on the sub display device when the sub display device shown in FIG. You may comprise so that it may become. For example, “One of the other effects” is an effect in which Tono fights the composer, and “The other effect in another effect” is an effect in which the princess dances. Also good. “One of the other effects” may be installed, one or more may be installed, or one of the “other effects” may be installed. Multiple types may be installed. In addition, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 33, the number of types of effects in which at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device rotate together is more When the sub display device rotates as shown at 64, the player can visually recognize that at least a part (or all of the image) displayed on the sub display device is not rotated together. You may be comprised so that the number of types may increase. Conversely, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 64, the player visually recognizes that at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device are not rotated together. 63, when the sub display device rotates as shown in FIG. 63, at least a part (or all) of the images displayed on the sub display device rotate together. You may be comprised so that the number of types may increase.

  Also, the effect example shown in FIG. 63 and the effect example shown in FIG. 64 may be combined. For example, in a period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image is prevented from being rotated so that the image displayed on the sub display device can be viewed by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. In the next period (period B), the sub display device is rotated at a speed B (for example, 40 rpm) in one direction (for example, counterclockwise), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or the whole of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed B ′ (for example, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed C (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed C ′ (for example, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. In the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is not rotated. At least part or all of the image is rotated in the other direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize that only the sub display device is rotating. Let In the next period (period E), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed E (for example, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or the whole of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed E ′ (for example, 40 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize it as rotating slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed F (for example, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is more than the sub display device. At least a part or all of the image is rotated in another direction (for example, clockwise) at a speed F ′ (for example, 20 rpm) so that the player can visually recognize the image as rotating slowly. During the period before the sub display device is rotated for the next period (period G), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so as to be visually recognized by the player so as to rotate together with the sub display device. Thus, as illustrated in the period A to the period D, as the sub display device rotates, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually shifts from the rotation of the sub display device. The sub display device is rotated, and a part of or all of the display of the sub display device is stopped so that the player can visually recognize the image, and a new sense of unity with the sub display device and the image is obtained. It may be possible to perform certain effects. Further, as illustrated in the period D to the period G, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device as the sub display device rotates. By causing the player to visually recognize the change as described above, it may be possible to perform a new sense of unity with the sub display device and the image. In these examples, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced during the periods A to D, and the sub display is performed during the periods D to G. Although the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, conversely, during the period A to D, the rotation speed of the sub display device is increased. The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased. During the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. You may comprise so that the difference in speed may be made small gradually. Also, here, the rotating sub display device and the image displayed on the rotating sub display device are illustrated, but the present invention is also applicable to the sub display device that moves linearly and the image that is displayed on the sub display device that moves linearly. Is also possible.

(F1)
A production movable body (for example, the movable body 1001 or the movable body 1002) capable of performing a movable operation for producing a game;
A decorative body (movable body 1008) provided with window portions (for example, transmission portions 1008a and 1008b);
A game machine equipped with
In some cases, the effect movable body performs an operation behind the decorative body (see, for example, FIGS. 52 (f) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table having the configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body can make the player visually recognize the operation of the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body, It is possible to perform an operation that is not seen on a daily basis, and sometimes the player can forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game.

(F2)
The game stand according to (F1) above,
The production movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,
It is configured to allow the player to visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window (see, for example, FIGS. 52 (f) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body is configured to be able to display an image, and therefore the operation and image of the effect movable body are displayed to the player through the window of the decorative body. As a notification means, it is possible to perform an operation that cannot be seen on a daily basis, and the player may forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game. In addition, a plurality of effect movable bodies that can display images may be provided, or only one may be provided. In addition, the effect movable body that can display an image that can be operated behind the decorative body may have a main liquid crystal unit or a sub liquid crystal unit. In addition, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image that can be operated behind the decorative body may have both the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, or may have two or more sub liquid crystal units. There may be.

(F3)
The game stand according to (F2) above,
Depending on the operation of the effect movable body, an image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window may change (for example, see FIGS. 52 (f) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the image displayed on the effect movable body visually recognized through the window portion of the decorative body changes by performing the operation behind the decorative body, There are cases where it can give you unbelievable surprises. In addition, the above-mentioned “the image of the effect movable body changes” means a case where an image displayed on the effect movable body is changed (for example, the shape or display color of a cloud image is changed). And the case where the appearance of the image displayed on the production movable body changes.

(F4)
The game stand according to any one of (F1) to (F3) above,
The decorative body is operable (see, for example, FIGS. 52 (e) and (f)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the decoration body can be operated, so that it may be possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the decoration body and the operation of the effect movable body are linked.

(F5)
The game stand according to any one of (F1) to (F4) above,
Provided with symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing variable display of symbols,
A game stand characterized by that.
(F6)
The game stand according to (F5) above,
In the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means, the player visually recognizes a part of the image (for example, a cloud image) on the effect movable body through the window portion of the ornament by the operation of the ornament. If it is possible, the final result of the variable display of the symbol is larger than the case where the player cannot visually see a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window of the decorative body. It is configured to make it easy to confirm and display the symbol aspect (for example, see FIG. 52 and FIG. 53),
A part of the image in the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the preview image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(F7)
The game stand according to (F5) or (F6) above,
Playing a part of an image of a reserved icon in a pre-reading mode (for example, a white rhombus mode) in the effect movable body through the window (for example, the transmission part 1008b) of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body When the player becomes visible, than when the player does not become able to visually recognize a part of the image of the hold icon that has been pre-read in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body, As a final result of the variable display of the symbol started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested, the jackpot symbol mode is configured to be easily displayed (for example, see FIG. 59).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F8)
The game stand according to any one of F1 to F7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(G1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030) can perform a rotation operation (for example, see FIG. 61).
The image display means on which the rotation operation is performed may display a first image (for example, a character image H1, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variation icon, etc.)
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIG. 61 (l)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the rotation operation of the image display means is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change, so the presence of the first image is amplified. In some cases, a strong impression can be given to the player. In addition, any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the variation icon, and the background design, or all of these images may be used as the first image. May have a different image as the first image. Further, the image display means capable of executing the rotation operation may be a main liquid crystal unit or a sub liquid crystal unit. In both cases, the aspect ratio of the first image may be displayed so as to change. For example, when the first image is displayed on the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit are rotated simultaneously or separately, and the aspect ratio of the first image is changed simultaneously or separately. There may be. Further, the first image may be displayed by two sub liquid crystal units by arranging two sub liquid crystal units. In this case, the aspect ratio of the first image may be changed by rotating the sub liquid crystal units in a lined state.

(G2)
The gaming machine according to (G1) above,
The image display means on which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image (for example, a decorative frame F1, a reserved number display, an image of a fourth pattern),
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image may not rotate (see, for example, FIGS. 62 (k) to (p)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(G3)
The game stand according to (G2) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image does not rotate (see, for example, FIGS. 62 (k) to (p)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the first image rotates, the second image may not rotate. Therefore, the second image is firmly fixed while emphasizing the rotation of the first image. It can be made visible to the player. In addition, there may be a case where any one of the images such as the character image, the decorative design, the hold icon, the change icon, and the background design, or all of these images are used as the second image. May have a different image as the second image.

(G4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (G1) to (G3) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, an image (for example, the princess character image H4) that has been cut off by the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed is displayed on the image display unit by performing the rotation operation. (See, for example, FIGS. 67 (b) and (c)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, an image that has been cut off in the image display unit before the image display unit is rotated is displayed on the image display unit by the rotation operation of the image display unit. In some cases, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.

(G5)
The game stand according to any one of (G1) to (G4) above,
When the rotation operation is performed, the image (for example, the princess character image H4) displayed on the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed is performed on the image display unit by performing the rotation operation. May be closed,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the image displayed on the image display unit before the image display unit is rotated can be cut off on the image display unit by the rotation of the image display unit. Because of this, it may be possible to give an unexpected surprise to the player.

(G6)
The game stand according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(G7)
The game stand according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

(H1)
An effect movable body (for example, a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) capable of executing an effect operation for producing a game
A base body (for example, a moving unit 1036) capable of supporting the effect movable body;
A game machine equipped with
The effect movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is capable of executing a rotation operation,
One of the effect movable body and the base body is provided with a slip ring (for example, rotation side substrates 1090 and 1140),
Conductive parts (for example, conductive parts 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) are provided on the other of the effect movable body and the base body,
When the slip ring and the conductive portion are in contact, power is supplied from the base body side to the effect movable body side,
A game stand characterized by that.
(H2)
The gaming machine according to (H1) above,
The base body is provided with a first communication means (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1138),
The effect movable body is provided with a second communication means (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1144),
The second communication means is means capable of receiving a signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H3)
The game stand according to (H1) or (H2) above,
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of optical wireless communication.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H4)
The game stand according to any one of (H1) to (H3) above,
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of laser communication.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H5)
The game stand according to any one of (H1) to (H4) above,
The slip ring (for example, the rotation side substrates 1090 and 1140) is provided on the effect movable body,
The conductive portions (for example, conductive portions 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) are provided on the base body.
A game stand characterized by that.
(H6)
The game stand according to any one of (H1) to (H5) above,
The effect movable body is provided with image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).
The second communication means is means capable of receiving an image information signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp and illumination until now is an example of a light emission means, and if a lamp | ramp emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube, it can replace.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine. The enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and modifications shown in the first to third embodiments can be combined.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG.
The game table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 69, “a plurality of types of reels 2002 that are rotated and driven, a start lever 2004 for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. A stop button 2006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery (winning prize internal lottery), and based on the lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. A determination means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it corresponds to the predetermined winning mode In addition to payout control means (medal payout processing 2008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 2010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 2014 that launches a ball into the game area 2012, a winning port 2016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 2018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning port 2016, A payout means 2020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 2018 detects a ball, a variable display device 2022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 2024 movable to a position where the variable display device 2022 is shielded. And a movable body 2026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and when the game ball enters the winning opening and wins, the variable display device 2022 displays the symbol. And in is stopped and displayed after being dynamic, it is also suitable to the slot machine 2000 ", which is the effect device 2010, such as to produce a game.

  The gaming table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 70 (a). “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 3002, execute a lottery based on the bet 3004 and the start 3006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 3008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and if cashout 3009 is selected, a casino machine 3000 that issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits from the receipt issuing machine 3010. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4B, the cellular phone 4000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 5000 provided with a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 6000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the cellular phone 4000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data via a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 5000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 6000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data about the game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 7000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. There is a case where electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 7000 to the home video game machine 6000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix 1)
A game machine having display means capable of displaying at least one of a plurality of displays,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a first display mode,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the first display in a third display mode,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a second display mode,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the second display in a fourth display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode different from the third display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode different from the fourth display mode,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the second display in the second display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode.
The display means is display means capable of displaying the second display at least in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the third display in a fifth display mode,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
The display means is display means capable of displaying at least the third display in the fifth display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3)
A game machine according to appendix 1 or 2,
The amount of change from the first display mode to the third display mode is the first amount of change,
The amount of change from the second display mode to the fourth display mode is the second amount of change,
The first change amount is the same change amount as the second change amount.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
At least a part of the first display displayed in the first display mode is one in which visibility is at least lowered when the display means is in the first state,
The first state is a state where at least the second display is displayed in the second display mode on the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 5)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
The first display is a display including at least a first animation display,
The second display is a display including at least a second animation display,
The first animation display is at least an animation display different from the second animation display,
The display means is a display means capable of continuously displaying at least the first animation display even when the display mode of the first display is switched from the first display mode to the third display mode. Yes,
The display means is a display means capable of continuously displaying at least the second animation display even when the display mode of the second display is switched from the second display mode to the fourth display mode. is there,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 6)
In the gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
The display means is a display means that does not display the second display in the fourth display mode when the first display is displayed in the first display mode,
The display unit is a display unit that does not display the second display in the second display mode when the first display is displayed in the third display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means may perform a rotation display of the first image,
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a2)
A game machine according to appendix a1,
When the rotation display is performed, the second image may not rotate.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a3)
A game machine according to appendix a2,
The second image does not rotate when the rotation display is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a3,
When the rotation display is performed, there is a case where an image that has been cut off by the image display unit before the rotation display is performed is displayed on the image display unit by performing the rotation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a4,
When the rotation display is performed, an image displayed on the image display unit before the rotation display is performed may be cut off on the image display unit by performing the rotation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b1)
Directing movable body,
Image display means;
A game machine equipped with
When operating the movable body for production in front of the image display means, there may be a first state in which a first image is displayed at a first position,
The first position is a position behind the effect movable body in the image display means,
The first image is an effect image,
When operating the movable body for production in front of the image display means, there may be a second state in which the first image is displayed at a second position,
The second position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b2)
A game machine according to appendix b1,
In the first state, the first image may be displayed across the first position and the third position,
The third position is a position different from the back of the effect movable body in the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b3)
A gaming table as set forth in appendix b1 or b2,
The size of the first image in the first state is a first size,
The size of the first image in the second state is a third size,
The third size is smaller than the first size.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
In the first state, the second image may be displayed in the first direction,
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in a second orientation,
The first image is an image different from the second image,
The second direction is a direction different from the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b5)
The game stand according to appendix b4,
The size of the second image in the first state is a second size,
The size of the second image in the second state is a fourth size,
The fourth size is smaller than the second size.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c1)
An image display unit capable of displaying an effect image for directing a game;
Drive means for driving the image display unit;
A game machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by driving the driving means,
During the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter referred to as “first period”), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c2)
The game stand according to appendix c1,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the first image.
(Appendix c3)
The game stand according to appendix c1 or c2,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction;
The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c4)
A game machine according to appendix c3,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction;
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c4,
The first video is a video including a mode in which a second image is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c6)
The game stand according to appendix c5,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c7)
A gaming table according to appendix c5 or c6,
The game table according to claim 1, wherein the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode using the second image.
(Appendix c8)
A gaming table according to appendix c3 or c4,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in Appendix c1 means “rotating by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in the appendix c1 means “the first image rotates in the first direction”.
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c9)
The game stand according to appendix c8,
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c7,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in Appendix c1 means “moving linearly by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in the supplementary note c1 means “the first image linearly moves in the first direction”.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c11)
Design display means;
A second image display means configured to include an image display capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game ;
First image display means different from the second image display means;
Driving means for driving the second image display means;
A game machine equipped with
The second image display means may move by driving the driving means,
During the period in which the second image display means is moving in the first direction (hereinafter referred to as “first period”), the first moving image may be displayed on the second image display means. ,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which an image moves in the first direction,
The second image display means can execute a first rotation as the first direction ,
During execution of the first rotation, an image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the second image display means, so that the pattern is the first image It is possible to show the player that it is not moving in the direction,
In a state before the second image display means performs the first rotation, an image of a part of the picture (hereinafter referred to as “first picture”) is displayed on the second image display means. Does not fit within the area, is not displayed on the second image display means,
The first display or the second display may be performed by rotating a predetermined angle in the first direction by the first rotation of the second image display means,
The first display is a display in which the first image is within the display area of the second image display means as the image of the first pattern.
The second display is a display in which the second image is contained in the display area of the second image display means as the image of the first pattern.
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, when the second display is performed rather than the case where the first display is performed, the jackpot symbol aspect is displayed after the symbol variation display. Easy to confirm,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c12)
A game machine according to appendix c11,
In the first period, the second image display means moves in the first direction,
In the first period, the picture is moved to the second orientation,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c13)
A game machine according to appendix c12,
In the first period, the second image display means moves at a first speed in the first direction,
In the first period, the pattern moves in the second direction at a second speed,
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c14)
A gaming machine according to appendix c12 or c13,
In the first period, the first image is displayed so as not to move in the first direction,
In the first period, the second image is displayed so as not to move in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c15)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c11 to c14,
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c11 to c15,
The second image display means can execute a linear movement.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c11 to c16,
The position where the first rotation is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c11 to c17,
When the first rotation is performed, the image displayed on the second image display unit before the first rotation is performed is performed on the second image by the first rotation. It may be cut off in the display means,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c11 to c18,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix c20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c11 to c18,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d1)
A game machine having a first movable body capable of performing a production operation to produce a game,
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
When the power is turned off, the first movable body is configured to move from the second position to the first position,
When the power is turned on, the first movable body is configured to move from the first position to the second position,
The second position and the first position are different positions,
The production operation is configured to start from the second position and end at the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d2)
A game machine according to appendix d1,
The first movable body is configured to move to the first position even when the power is turned off in a state where the first movable body is located at a position different from the second position. Yes,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d3)
A game machine as set forth in appendix d1 or d2,
The production operation includes an operation of moving to a third position,
The third position and the first position are different positions;
The third position and the second position are different positions.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d4)
A game machine according to appendix d3,
Image display means,
The first movable body is a movable body provided in front of the image display means,
The third position is a position in front of the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d5)
A game machine according to appendix d4,
Can perform a big hit
The first movable body is a movable body provided in front of the image display means,
When the first movable body is located at the third position, the first movable body may overlap at least a part of the preview image displayed on the image display means,
The notice image is the notice image of the jackpot,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first movable body is capable of executing an initial operation on condition that a power source is turned on.
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in the appendix d1 means “the first movable body starts the initial operation from the first position. And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first movable body is capable of executing an initial operation on condition that a power source is turned on.
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in appendix d1 means “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position. After moving to, start the initial operation and move to the second position again at the end of the initial operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d7,
“When the power is turned off” described in the appendix d1 means “when the main power of the game machine is turned off”
“When the power is turned on” described in the appendix d1 is “when the main power of the game machine is turned on”.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d8,
The first movable body is a movable body whose posture can be changed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d9,
Provided with a second movable body capable of performing a production operation to produce a game,
The second movable body is a movable body that starts operation from a position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d10,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix d12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d10,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e1)
An image display unit capable of displaying an effect image for directing a game;
Drive means for driving the image display unit;
A game machine equipped with
The image display unit may move by driving the driving means,
During the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter referred to as “first period”), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a first image moves in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e2)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1,
The first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the first image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e3)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1 or e2,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second direction;
The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e4)
A gaming machine according to appendix e3,
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move at a first speed in the first direction;
In the first period, the first image is configured to move at a second speed in the second direction;
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e4,
The first video is a video including a mode in which a second image is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e6)
A gaming machine according to appendix e5,
In the first period, the second image is configured not to move in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e7)
A gaming machine according to appendix e5 or e6,
The first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode by the second image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
“Moving by driving of the driving means” described in appendix e1 means “rotating by driving of the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in the appendix e1 means “the first image rotates in the first direction”.
The first direction is a rotation direction around the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e9)
A gaming machine according to appendix e3 or e4,
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix e10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e7,
“Moving by driving the driving means” described in Appendix e1 means “moving linearly by driving the driving means”
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in the appendix e1 means “the first image linearly moves in the first direction”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix f1)
A direction movable body capable of performing a movable operation for directing a game,
A decorative body provided with a window,
A game machine equipped with
The stage movable body may perform an operation behind the decorative body.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f2)
A game machine according to appendix f1,
The production movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image,
It is configured to allow the player to visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window portion.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f3)
A game machine according to appendix f2,
Depending on the operation of the effect movable body, the image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window may change.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f3,
The decorative body is operable;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f4,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing a variable display of symbols,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f6)
A gaming machine according to appendix f5,
In the variation display of the symbol by the symbol display means, when the player can visually recognize a part of the image in the effect movable body through the window portion of the ornament by the operation of the ornament, The jackpot symbol form is more easily displayed as a final result of the symbol variation display than when the player cannot visually recognize a part of the image on the effect movable body through the window portion of the ornament. Is configured to be
A part of the image in the effect movable body is an image of at least a part of the preview image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f7)
A gaming machine according to appendix f5 or f6,
When the player can visually recognize a part of the hold icon image that has been pre-read in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body, The hold corresponding to the hold icon has been digested and started compared to the case where the player cannot visually recognize a part of the hold icon image that has been pre-read in the effect movable body through the window portion. As a final result of the symbol variation display, it is configured so that the big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix f8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices f1 to f7,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix g1)
A game machine with image display means,
The image display means can execute a rotation operation,
The image display means on which the rotation operation is performed may display a first image,
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g2)
The game stand according to appendix g1,
The image display means on which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image,
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image may not rotate.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g3)
A gaming machine according to appendix g2,
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image is not rotated.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g3,
When the rotation operation is performed, an image that has been cut off in the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed may be displayed on the image display unit by performing the rotation operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g4,
When the rotation operation is performed, the image displayed on the image display unit before the rotation operation is performed may be cut off on the image display unit by performing the rotation operation.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix g7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices g1 to g5,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 First decorative symbol display device 224 Production movable body 226 General winning opening 228, 229 General drawing starting opening 230 Special drawing 1 starting opening 232 Special drawing 2 starting opening 232a Blade member 234 Variable winning opening 234a Door member

Claims (10)

Design display means;
A second image display means configured to include an image display capable of displaying an effect image for producing a game ;
First image display means different from the second image display means;
Driving means for driving the second image display means;
A game machine equipped with
The second image display means may move by driving the driving means,
During the period in which the second image display means is moving in the first direction (hereinafter referred to as “first period”), the first moving image may be displayed on the second image display means. ,
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which an image moves in the first direction,
The second image display means can execute a first rotation as the first direction ,
During execution of the first rotation, an image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the second image display means, so that the pattern is the first image It is possible to show the player that it is not moving in the direction,
In a state before the second image display means performs the first rotation, an image of a part of the picture (hereinafter referred to as “first picture”) is displayed on the second image display means. Does not fit within the area, is not displayed on the second image display means,
The first display or the second display may be performed by rotating a predetermined angle in the first direction by the first rotation of the second image display means,
The first display is a display in which the first image is within the display area of the second image display means as the image of the first pattern.
The second display is a display in which the second image is contained in the display area of the second image display means as the image of the first pattern.
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, when the second display is performed rather than the case where the first display is performed, the jackpot symbol aspect is displayed after the symbol variation display. Easy to confirm,
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 1,
In the first period, the second image display means moves in the first direction,
In the first period, the picture is moved to the second orientation,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
In the first period, the second image display means moves at a first speed in the first direction,
In the first period, the pattern moves in the second direction at a second speed,
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2 or 3,
In the first period, the first image is displayed so as not to move in the first direction,
In the first period, the second image is displayed so as not to move in the first direction.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The second image display means can execute a linear movement.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
The position where the first rotation is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
When the first rotation is performed, the image displayed on the second image display unit before the first rotation is performed is performed on the second image by the first rotation. It may be cut off in the display means,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

Images